2018 Jeep Wrangler JL-Owner`s Manual

2018 Jeep Wrangler JL-Owner`s Manual
2018
OWNER’S MANUAL
All-New Wrangler
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4
5
SAFETY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
5
6
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
6
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
7
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
9
10
MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
10
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
11
12
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
▫ Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
▫ Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger vehicles are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time
to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for
on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or
use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive
vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle
controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your
vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving
skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road,
or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” section for
further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer
oriented documents. In the attached Warranty Booklet you
will find a description of the services that FCA offers to its
customers, the Warranty Certificate and the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please
take the time to read all of these publications carefully
before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable
operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
INTRODUCTION
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
If applicable, refer to the owners manual supplement for
related information.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
5
Rollover Warning Label
1
6 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
INTRODUCTION
Symbols
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
CONTENTS
䡵 FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
䡵 REAR VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment
2 — Windshield
3 — Exterior Mirrors
4 — Headlights
5 — Wheels
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
REAR VIEW
2
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2— Swing Gate
12 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Outlet
2 — Turn Signal/High Beam Control
3 — Instrument Cluster
4 — Multifunction Lever
5 — Storage Compartment
6 — Push Button Ignition
7 — Steering Wheel
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 13
INTERIOR
2
Interior Features
1 — Door Handles
2 — Seats
3 — Gear Selector
4 — Power Window Switches
5 — Climate Controls
6 — Uconnect System
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .30
▫ Vehicle On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .25
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped . . . .26
䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .28
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Front Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
3
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) . . . . . . .41
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .60
▫ Manual Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .60
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat —
Two Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat —
Four Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Fold And Tumble Rear Seat —
Two Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . .63
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Front Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models . . . . .55
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models . . . . .57
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .59
▫ Lights-On Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . .67
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Automatic Climate Controls Overview. . . . . . . . .74
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
䡵 POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
䡵 DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Removing The Soft Top — Four Door Models . . .86
▫ Installing The Soft Top — Four Door Models . . . .88
䡵 FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Front Panel(s) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Freedom Top Storage Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Front Panel(s) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Rear Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Rear Hard Top Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
䡵 DOOR FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Door Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Door Frame Installation Four Door Models —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Door Frame Installation Two Door Models —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
䡵 SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
▫ Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Raising The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
䡵 SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
3
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
䡵 REAR SWING GATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
䡵 POWER SLIDING TOP — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .145
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .157
▫ Opening The Power Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . . .157
▫ Closing The Power Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .160
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Power Top Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Relearn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Rear Quarter Window Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
䡵 FOLDING WINDSHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Lowering The Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Raising The Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Opening The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .171
▫ Closing The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Keyless Go and a
START/STOP push button ignition system. The Remote
Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob with a mechanical key and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
KEYS
Key Fob
NOTE: The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle if it
is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
swing gate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
by pressing the appropriate button on the fob. The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Key Fob
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Flip Key Release Button
Unlock Button
Lock Button
Remote Start Button
Panic Button
NOTE:
• In the ON/RUN position, the lock button is disabled.
Only the unlock button is enabled.
3
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Backup Mode Starting
To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob against the
ENGINE START/STOP button, and push to operate the
ignition switch.
Push and release the key fob unlock button once to unlock
the driver’s door only, or twice to unlock all the doors and
swing gate. When the key fob unlock button is pushed, the
Illuminated Entry will initiate, and the turn signal lights
will flash twice.
To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signals will flash, and the horn will chirp
once to acknowledge the lock signal.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE: When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be
indicated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster, and the fob
LED will no longer illuminate with a button press.
The recommended replacement battery is CR2450.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate .
1. Remove the back cover of the fob by inserting a flatblade screw driver into the slot on the bottom of the fob.
Pry until the cover unsnaps being careful not to damage
the seal. Proceed counter-clockwise to pry the remaining
snaps until the battery cover can be removed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
3
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
Battery Replacement
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a small flatblade screwdriver into the battery removal slot and
sliding the battery forward and up being careful not to
damage the electronic board underneath.
3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making sure the
positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the battery until it is
seated securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is properly
aligned before snapping it back in place.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by your
authorized dealer.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Request For Additional Key Fobs
General Information
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
NOTE:
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match the
vehicle locks.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob
(side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
3
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• The engine will start.
WARNING!
START/STOP Ignition Button
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Starting The Engine,⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to
the chime, the message will display “Ignition Or Accessory
On” in the cluster.
NOTE: The power window switches will remain active up
to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The time for this feature is programmable.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine in
the OFF position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above
80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats, and optional
heated steering wheel in temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C).
Refer to “Heated Seats” and in “Seats” in this section for
further information.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within
five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third
time shuts the engine off.
3
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• Malfunction indicator light not illuminated
• The vehicle must be started with the key after two
consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Swing Gate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• All removable doors must not be removed
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — Swing Gate Open
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock
the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via
the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument
cluster display until you push the ignition START button.
3
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
SENTRY KEY
When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Controls,
optional heated seats, and optional heated steering wheel
in temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C). These features will
stay on through the duration of Remote Start or until the
ignition switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
operation by disabling the vehicle. The system does not
need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The system uses the key fob to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds
if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
CAUTION!
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks are disabled. The vehicle security
alarm provides both audible and visible signals. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will
provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if
the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with
the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE:
DOORS
• The driver’s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
CAUTION!
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
Manual Door Locks
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, push
the rocker lever forward to the lock position and close the
door. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever rearward.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Manual Door Lock
3
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or
unlock the doors, swing gate, glove compartment, and
console storage.
WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and exit the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the
ignition and remove the key from the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Push the switch forward to lock the doors, and
rearward to unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
1 — Lock Button
2 — Unlock Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and exit the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the
ignition and remove the key from the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If Equipped)
The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and swing gate
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle passive
entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may
interfere with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the passive entry system from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
• Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(Low Beams, License Plate Lamp, Position Lamps) for
whichever time duration is set between 0, 30 (default),
60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
3
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver Side
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle
to unlock all doors and the swing gate automatically.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function only if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Push” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any passive entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and
alert the customer. If Passive Entry is disabled using
Uconnect System, the key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in
Vehicle⬙ remains active/functional.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles,
pushing the passive entry lock button will lock the vehicle
doors and the swing gate.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a
FOBIK-Safe operation when a valid Passive Entry key fob
is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
• A valid Passive Entry key fob is also detected outside of
the vehicle.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
NOTE: DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle.
3
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors & the swing gate will unlock when you grab hold of
the swing gate handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate
The Swing Gate passive entry unlock feature is built into
handle of the Swing Gate. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the Swing Gate, grab the Swing
Gate handle to unlock the Swing Gate automatically, and
pull the Swing Gate to open.
Swing Gate Passive Entry Location
To Lock The Swing Gate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
swing gate, pushing the passive entry lock button will lock
the vehicle doors and the swing gate.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE:
3. Repeat steps one and two for the opposite rear door.
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using any Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
3
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the
key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in Vehicle⬙ remains
active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with ChildProtection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate
to the lock or unlock position.
Child Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock lever rearward (located on the door trim panel),
roll down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Front Door Removal
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
Door Removal Warning Label
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed.
NOTE:
• Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
• Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 10 N·m / 7.5 ft· lb).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
3. Remove the check screw from the center door check
(using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.
3
Door Check (Detached)
Hinge Pin Screw
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the plastic wiring access door under the instrument panel by sliding the plastic panel along the door
frame toward the seats until the tabs are detached.
5. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring
harness.
Closed Wiring Harness
Wiring Access Door
NOTE: Do not pry back to open, as this will break the
plastic cover.
1 – Locking Tab
2 – Wiring Harness
6. Push and hold down the black security tab under the
wiring harness, and lift the harness into the open
position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used
to assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling.
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
Open Wiring Harness
1 – Wiring Harness
2 – Security Tab
7. With the wiring harness open, pull downward on the
wiring connector to unplug. Store wiring connector in
the lower door basket.
8. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
Door Removal Warning Label
3
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed.
NOTE:
• Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
• Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 10 N·m / 7.5 ft· lb).
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the
rear cargo tray located under the rear load floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
3. Remove the check screw from the center door check
(using a #T40 Torx head driver).
5. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access door
from the bottom of the B-pillar.
3
Door Check (Attached)
4. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
Wiring Access Door
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Unplug the wiring connector.
NOTE: Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness.
This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the wiring
connector to be unplugged.
NOTE: The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be
used to assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Wiring Connector
7. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Manual Front Seats
Front Seat Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the
seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Adjustment Bar Location
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
3
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the
seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat, push
downward on the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes
may be necessary to achieve the desired position.
Recline Strap
WARNING!
Seat Height Adjustment
Front Seatback Recline
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean forward
or backward, depending on the direction you would like the
seatback to move. Release the strap when the desired position is reached and the seatback will lock into place.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Lumbar Support
The lumbar control knob is located on the outboard side of
the front driver seat. Rotate the control forward to increase
and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar
support.
3
Heated Seat Buttons
Lumbar Control Knob
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seats control buttons are located on the center
instrument panel below the touchscreen, and are also
located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Push the heated seat button
setting on.
once to turn the HI
• Push the heated seat button
the MED setting on.
a second time to turn
• Push the heated seat button
LO setting on.
a third time to turn the
• Push the heated seat button
heating elements off.
a fourth time to turn the
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
• The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s seat can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two Door
Models
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the outboard side of the seat back, and slide the entire seat
forward.
NOTE:
• The front passenger seats have a track memory, which
returns the seat to its original position.
• The recline strap and easy entry lever should not be used
during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting
position.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
Easy Entry Lever
To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the seatback
upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the
track locks.
• The center head restraints must be in the lowest position
to avoid contact with the center console when folding
the seat.
3
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
To Fold Down The Rear Seat
There are two release levers located on each upper outboard side of the rear seat. The larger of the two release
levers folds down the seat and the head restraint simultaneously. The smaller lever folds down the head restraint
independently for improved visibility.
To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release lever and
slowly fold down the seatback. The head restraint will fold
automatically with the seat when this lever is pulled.
Seatback Release Lever
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal. By simply
opening the seats to the open position, the seat cushion will
return to its normal shape over time.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
To Raise The Rear Seat
Folding The Rear Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. Then, raise the
head restraint until it locks into place. If interference from
the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking,
you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper
position.
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback
forward.
3
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Models
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
Rear Seatback Release Lever
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Retention Straps
Removing The Rear Seat
1. There are two retention straps located on the back of the
rear seat and two corresponding wire loops located on
the back of each b-pillar. Open the velcro on the strap
and thread through the wire loop. Fold the velcro over
to keep the seat in the folded position. This should be
done on both sides.
1. Push down on the release bar on each side, and pull the
seat out and away from the lower bracket.
Release Bar Location
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
3. To reinstall the rear seat, just reverse these steps.
Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap
2. To return the seat to its normal upright position, reverse
these steps.
NOTE: Do not drive the vehicle without reattaching the
rear seat latches.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure that the seats are fully
latched.
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a rear
armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull strap
under the head restraint and pull it forward.
3
Rear Seat Armrest
NOTE: The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then
push the adjustment button and the release button at the
base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. The release button does
not need to be pushed to adjust the head restraint.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable, but foldable
head restraints.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the release
strap located on the upper outboard side of each rear seat.
3
Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Location
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Rear Head Restraints Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up
on the head restraint until it locks into place.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for information
on child seat tether routing.
• Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head
restraints installed while passengers are occupying
the rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area
without the head restraints installed are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but foldable,
outboard head restraints, as well as an adjustable, removable center head restraint.
3
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the smaller of
the release levers, located on the upper outboard side of the
rear seat.
Rear Head Restraint Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up
on the head restraint until it locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head
restraint. To lower the center head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push down on the head restraint.
Rear Head Restraint Lever
To remove the center head restraint, push the release
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and pull
upward on the head restraint.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To install the head restraint, hold the release button while
pushing downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for information on
child seat tether routing.
NOTE: Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact
with the center console when folding the seat down.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the
operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not
turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the touchscreen and
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Push the heated steering wheel button
the heating element on.
once to turn
• Push the heated steering wheel button
to turn the heating element off.
a second time
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
3
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turn on or off
through the touchscreen.
• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature
on.
3
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Rearview Mirror
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
passenger side mirror.
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the door panel
next to the door handle.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Vanity Mirrors
Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the
mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror
cover upward.
Power Mirror Switch
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Vanity Mirror
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if
equipped, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light
dimming, interior lights, and fog lights — if equipped.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light, and instrument panel light operation.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights come on at a low intensity level when
shifted into any position other than PARK (auto transmission) or when the vehicle begins to move (manual transmission).
NOTE: The Daytime Running Light, on the same side of
the vehicle as the active turn signal, will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again
when the turn signal is not operating.
Headlight Switch
3
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
High/Low Beam Switch
Flash-To-Pass
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pull the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel to return the
lights to low beams.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
Multifunction Lever
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
low beam headlights and push in the center of the headlight switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch
control knob a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times then automatically turn off.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Front Fog Light Switch
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights will turn on when the front doors are
opened, by rotating the dimmer controls on the headlight
switch fully upward, or, if equipped, when the unlock
button is pushed on the key fob.
3
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The interior courtesy lights are located in the center of the
vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one large center light and
four smaller reading lights. Each reading light can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second
time will turn the light off.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and
are located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
Dome Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating
the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will
cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is also known
as “Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open
for extended periods of time without discharging the
vehicle’s battery.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights. Rotating the left dimmer control
will adjust the interior and ambient light levels.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past
the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
3
Refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in this section for
further information on using the rear window wiper/
washer.
Front Wiper Control
CAUTION!
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Windshield Washers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles,
desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent
position for one of four intermittent settings. The delay
cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate
for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released.
Then, the intermittent interval previously selected will
resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wipers
will turn off.
WARNING!
Front Wiper Control
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If
the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist Feature
Pull up on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear
off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as the
lever is held up, the wipers will continue to operate.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
3
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position
for intermittent operation and to the second detent
for continuous rear wiper operation.
Mist Control
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
A rotary switch on the center portion of the windshield
wiper/washer lever controls the operation of the rear
wiper/washer function.
Push the wiper lever toward the instrument
panel to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump and wiper will continue to operate as long
as the lever is held.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to
the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return to the
“park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume function at whichever position the switch is set at.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Climate Controls – Heater Only
Manual Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED illuminates when the A/C
system is engaged.
MAX A/C Setting
Turn the temperature control knob to the MAX Air Conditioning (A/C) setting to engage MAX
Air Conditioning (A/C). This is the coldest setting.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
3
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the off position.
Modes Control
Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Icon
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the Knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
3
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Controls Overview
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout
the vehicle. The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio.
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press to change to the coldest setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing
the button again causes the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX
A/C indicator turns off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change
the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can
be used in all modes. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Icon
Description
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
The Rear Defrost Control button turns on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after a short period of time.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
3
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Panel Mode
Description
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
Modes Control
Press the button to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Icon
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
3
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
turn the air conditioning system on and off. When the
system is turned on, cool dehumidified air flows through
the vents into the cabin.
For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn
off the air conditioning off and adjust the blower and
airflow mode settings. Make sure to only select Panel,
Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or windows,
select Defrost mode and increase the blower speed.
• If the air conditioning performance is lower than expected, there may a blockage. Gently clean the area
around the radiator with water.
MAX A/C
The MAX A/C setting provides the maximum cooling
performance.
Press the button to toggle between MAX A/C and your
prior setting. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
In the MAX A/C setting, you can adjust the blower level
and mode position. Pressing other settings causes the MAX
A/C operation to switch to your desired setting.
Recirculation
The Recirculation button helps remove smoke, odors, or
high humidity from the cabin.
The indicator illuminates when Recirculation mode is on.
Press the button again to turn it off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
NOTE: Using Recirculation in cold weather may cause the
windows to fog up and this mode may be unavailable on
the touchscreen.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
3
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Operating Tips Chart
3
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power window switches are located on the instrument
panel below the climate controls. Push the switch downward to open the window and upward to close the
window.
The top left switch controls the left front window and the
top right switch controls the right front window.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Driver Side Front Window Switch
Passenger Side Front Window Switch
Passenger Side Rear Window Switch
Window Lockout Switch
Driver Side Rear Window Switch
NOTE:
• The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger
window, and the lower right switch controls the right rear
passenger window.
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with your
vehicle located in the center console. This kit includes the
necessary tools required for the operations described in the
following sections. All pieces fit into the ratchet for easy
use.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting the
window opening.
DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, the soft top
system will be provided in a separate box located in the
rear of the vehicle for shipping purposes only. The soft top
and the hard top are to be used independently. Your
vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from
both tops being installed at the same time.
Provided Tools
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
#50 Torx Head Driver
#40 Torx Head Driver
15mm Socket
Ratchet
3
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Removing The Soft Top — Four Door Models
1. Fully lower the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Four Door
Models” in this section.
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet,
unscrew the two Torx head screws on each lift assist
mechanism, then lift the mechanism up and away from
the vehicle.
2. Make sure the lift assist mechanism on both the driver’s
and passenger’s sides are in the “lock” position before
removing.
Lift Assist Mechanism
Lock Position
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail rearward to
release the side link from the track.
3
Pull To Release Top From Track
5. Repeat on the opposite side.
Release Lever Location
6. Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a
clean, dry location (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).
NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold the
bundle up, the other to remove the brackets.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet,
unscrew the Torx screw on both rear corners of the
vehicle, removing the retainers.
Installing The Soft Top — Four Door Models
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in
this section.
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top
removal:
• Right and left side door frames
• Eight door frame attachment Torx head screws
• Right and left side quarter windows
• Rear window
• Swing gate bar
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Rear Hard Top Removal” in this section.
Remove Rear Retainers
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame Installation — Four Door Models” in this section.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
4. Install the rear retainers on each side of the rear of the
vehicle using the provided #50 Torx head driver and
ratchet. Refer to the table below for recommended
torque specifications.
5. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in the “lock”
position, lift the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with
the side links pointing toward the front. Lower the lift
assist mechanisms onto its retainers on both sides (on
the inside of the sport bar).
Installing Rear Retainers
Soft Top In Place
Torque
Specification
For Torx Screw
119.5 In-lbs
13.5 N·m
Maximum
Minimum
150.5 In-lbs
17.0 N·m
106.2 In-lbs
12.0 N·m
NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold the
soft top up, the other to align the brackets.
3
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet,
tighten the Torx screws by turning them clockwise.
Secure them until they are snug (refer to the table below
for recommended torque specifications), being careful
not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Repeat on
the opposite side.
Torque
Specification
For Torx Screws
119.5 In-lbs
13.5 N·m
Maximum
Minimum
150.5 In-lbs
17.0 N·m
106.2 In-lbs
12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws
if they are overtightened.
Lift Assist Mechanism In Place
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
7. While pulling the release lever on the top of the rail
rearward, place the side link into the guide track on the
top of the rail then release the lever.
NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not
tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.
FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD
TOP — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Step Seven
8. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
top wrap.
9. Raise the soft top. Refer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this
section.
• The hard top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it
was not designed as a structural member of the
vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the front header, sport bar,
and body side or fully removed.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to panel removal. Removing the top, opening a door
or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
3
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Front Panel(s) Removal
NOTE: The driver’s side panel must be removed before
removing the passenger’s side panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the driver’s side panel
(one at the front, the rear, and outside), unlocking them
from the roof.
Roof Panel Lock Locations
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
3. Unlatch the driver’s side header panel latch located at
the top of the windshield.
Freedom Top Storage Bag
Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modular Hard Top,
come with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to
store your Freedom Top panels. The storage bag contains
two compartments and fits behind the rear seat.
Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are
facing upward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap.
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed
prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag.
1. Insert the left side Freedom panel into the bag with the
latches facing upward.
Header Panel Latch Locations
1 — Header Panel Latches
2 — Unlatched Position
4. Remove the driver’s side panel.
5. Repeat the steps above to remove the passenger’s side
panel.
Left Panel — Latches Facing Upward
3
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
laying flat).
3. Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the
latches facing downward.
Fold Divider Over Left Panel
Right Panel — Latches Facing Downward
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed
prior to inserting the panel into the bag.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed.
6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints
and loop the strap through the buckle. Pull on the strap
to tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear
seat.
Front Panel(s) Installation
1. Set the passenger side panel on the windshield frame
with the locating pin in the front receiver mounting hole
followed by the driver’s side panel, making sure there is
no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are sitting
flush with the body.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Storage Bag Closed
5. Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and
straps facing the back of the rear seat. Attach the clip at
the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorage,
located at the base of the rear seat.
3
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)
Removal” in this section.
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard
top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside — three
screws on each side) using the #50 Torx head driver.
2. Open both doors.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet,
remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard
top at the B-pillar (near the top of the front door).
Step Four
Step Three
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of
the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.
6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose on the left rear
inside corner of the vehicle.
3
Step Five
Wire Harness
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Release the locking tab by pushing it downward.
8. To remove the wiring harness, push the tab inward
while pulling downward to disconnect.
Push Locking Tab Downward
Push Tab Inward
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
Pull Wiring Harness To Separate
Release Button On Hose
10. Lower the rear window, and close the swing gate.
9. To remove the washer hose, push the release button on
hose connector, and pull downward.
11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the hard
top on a soft surface to prevent damage.
CAUTION!
The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults
located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution
could damage the Freedom Top.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Hard Top Installation
NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft top usage,
they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top.
Refer to “Door Frame” in this section for installation
procedures.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in
reverse order.
Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body
at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap
between the lift glass and hard top.
NOTE:
• The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body
should be torqued to 88 in lb +/- 22 in lb (10 N·m +/2.5 N·m) using the provided #50 Torx head driver and
ratchet.
DOOR FRAME
WARNING!
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection
that they can provide. This procedure is furnished
for use during off-road operation only.
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• Opening a door or lowering a window while the top
is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s
interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable door
frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
2. Once all the way loosened, remove the screws by
pulling downward.
NOTE: Screws will not fall out once completely loose, as
they are held in place by an internal mechanism.
Door Frame Removal
NOTE: In four door models, the rear door frames must be
removed first, followed by the front door frames.
1. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet,
loosen the Torx screws located on the underside of each
door frame (two per door).
Remove Screws From Below Frame
Door Frame Screw Locations
3
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection
that they can provide. This procedure is furnished
for use during off-road operation only.
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
Door Frame Installation Four Door Models —
If Equipped
Step Three
4. Store screws in a secure location.
5. Repeat procedure on the front door frame (four door
models).
1. Install the front door rail first.
2. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal at
the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for the
Torx head screws (two for each door).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail, and
insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with #40
Torx head driver until they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of the
body side, just behind the rear door opening.
3
Step Four
Step Three
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws
if they are overtightened.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto the
rear of the front door rail, making sure rubber seals lay
flat. Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoid
water leaks.
6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail, and
insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with #40
Torx head driver until they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Position Of Frame Above Door
Step Six
1 — Front Door Rail
2 — Rear Door Frame
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
Door Frame Installation Two Door Models —
If Equipped
1. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal at
the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for the
Torx head screws (two for each door).
2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail, and
insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with #40
Torx head driver until they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Step Two
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws
if they are overtightened.
3
SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
up/removed unless the quarter windows are also
removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the
vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers.
• The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements. Do
not rely on them to contain occupants within the
vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft tops.
The lift assist mechanism and side bows may cause
serious injury if fingers or hands get caught in
between.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and,
thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash.
Window scratches and wax build up may result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is below
41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or fully
lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models” in
“Bodywork” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information. It contains important information on
cleaning and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing. Damage to the top
may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top has
been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear
to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put
up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl
coating on the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the
top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C)
or below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the
rear or side curtains.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
CAUTION! (Continued)
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
3
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Soft Top
Side View Top And Components
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
Bow
Bow
Bow
Bow
Bow
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
#6 Bow
Rear Quarter Window
Lower Window Retainer
Front Window Retainer
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
Rear View Top And Components
1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
NOTE: The rear window and rear quarter windows must
be removed before lowering the soft top to prevent damage
to the top. Clean the side and rear windows before removal
to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the
soft top. If the plastic retainers are difficult to operate due
to road dust, etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and
a small brush. Cleaning products are available through an
authorized dealer.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear window’s
plastic retainers from the lower right and left corners.
2. Grasp the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and upward
releasing it from both the right and left retainers.
Step Two (Left Side Shown)
Step One
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
3. While holding the window in place, slide the tailgate bar
to the left separating it from the rear window. Store in
soft window bag, or a safe location.
4. Remove the plastic retainers from both quarter window
pillars.
3
Step Four
Step Three
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to the left
until it is completely separate from its retainer. Do not
pull downward while removing the rear window.
Damage to the retainer could result.
Step Five
Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:
1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom corner
outward and release tab from the bottom of the window
pillar.
Step One
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
2. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove plastic retainer
from along the bottom of the window moving toward
the front of the vehicle.
3. Remove plastic retainer from bottom to top of the
window.
3
Step Three
Step Two
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. While keeping the window level, slide rearward until it
is completely separate from its retainer. Do not pull
downward while removing the window. Damage to
the retainer could result.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider Position
1. After removing the rear window and quarter panel
windows, move to the front of the vehicle.
2. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.
3. Release the header latches from the crossbar by pulling
the handle downward. Make sure the hook is disengaged from its receiver.
Step Four
5. Store in soft window bag or a safe location.
Step Three
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
4. From both the driver and passenger sides, lift up on the
#1 Bow of the soft top to start the operation.
NOTE: If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider position,
secure the top by using the two velcro straps provided in
the center console.
3
Step Four
5. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link to
fold the soft top rearward into the Sunrider position.
Secured Top When In Sunrider Position
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Soft Top Into Fully Lowered Position
1. From the Sunrider position, remove straps if previously
secured and move to the rear of the vehicle.
3. Pull the latch downward to release the top, and allow
the soft top to slide rearward freely in the guide tracks
to the stowed position.
2. Locate the Sunrider latch beneath the #6 Bow of the soft
top on the driver’s side.
Step Three
Sunrider Latch Beneath #6 Bow
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
4. While pushing downward slightly on the folded soft
top, slide the lock lever on the driver and passenger side
lift assist mechanisms to the “lock” position.
3
Lock Position
Step Four
5. Once the lock is in the “lock” position, push downward
on each side of the folded soft top to ensure it is secure.
An audible “click” may be heard.
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Raising The Soft Top
Raising The Soft Top From The Fully Lowered Position
1. While pushing down on the rear of the top, slide the
lock lever on the driver and passenger side Lift Assist
Mechanisms to the “unlock” position.
Unlocked Position
Push Down While Unlocking
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
2. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along the guide
track until it locks into the Sunrider position with an
audible “click”.
4. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward the
front of the vehicle guiding the top into the closed
position.
3
Step Two
3. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure the top is
locked in the Sunrider position.
Lower Top Into Closed Position
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header
latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver.
Repeat on the other side.
6. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the latch
plate, locking the latch into place.
Step Six
Step Five
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of the
window into the retainer and slide forward while keeping the window level. Repeat on the other side.
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into the top
cover, and insert the bottom tab into the clip.
3
Step Two
Step One
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Step Two
3. Engage the plastic retainers along the bottom of the
quarter window and up the front of the window. Repeat
on the other side.
Step Three
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
Install The Rear Window
1. Guide the rear window into the retainer from left to
right while keeping the window level.
2. Insert the tailgate bar into the retainers at the bottom of
the window from left to the right.
3
Step Two
Step One
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right side
retainers.
5. Repeat with the driver’s side quarter window.
Step Five
Step Three
4. Line up the rear window to the passenger side quarter
window first, and engage the plastic retainers.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
6. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right and
left corners.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements. Do
not rely on them to contain occupants within the
vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft tops.
The lift assist mechanism and side bows may cause
serious injury if fingers or hands get caught in
between.
CAUTION!
Step Six
SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
up/removed unless the quarter windows are also
removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the
vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers.
(Continued)
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and,
thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
3
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top has
been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear
to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put
up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl
coating on the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the
top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C)
or below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the
rear or side curtains.
CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build up may
result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is below
41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or fully
lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models”
in “Bodywork” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information. It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle’s fabric
top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing. Damage to the top
may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
Lowering The Soft Top
3
Side View Top And Components
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
Bow
Bow
Bow
Bow
Bow
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
#6 Bow
Rear Quarter Window
Lower Window Retainer
Front Window Retainer
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear View Top And Components
1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
NOTE: The rear window and rear quarter windows must
be removed before lowering the soft top to prevent damage
to the top. Clean side and rear windows before removal to
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft
top. If the plastic retainers are difficult to operate due to
road dust, etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a
small brush. Cleaning products are available through your
authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear window’s
plastic retainers from the lower right and left corners.
2. Grasp the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and upward
releasing it from both the right and left retainers.
3
Step Two (Left Side Shown)
Step One
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. While holding the window in place, slide the tailgate bar
to the left separating it from the rear window. Store in
soft window bag, or a safe location.
4. Remove the plastic retainers from both quarter window
pillars.
Step Four
Step Three
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to the left
until it is completely separate from its retainer. Do not
pull downward while removing the rear window.
Damage to the retainer could result.
Step Five
Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:
1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom corner
outward and release tab from the bottom of the window
pillar.
Step One
3
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove plastic retainer
from along the bottom of the window moving toward
the front of the vehicle.
3. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to the top of
the front window.
Step Three
Step Two
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
4. While keeping the window level, slide rearward until it
is completely separate from its retainer. Do not pull
downward while removing the window. Damage to
the retainer could result.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider Position
1. After removing the rear window and quarter panel
windows, move to the front of the vehicle.
2. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.
3. Release the header latches from the crossbar by pulling
the handle downward. Make sure the hook is disengaged from its receiver.
Step Four
5. Store in soft window bag or a safe location.
Step Three
3
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. From both the driver and passenger sides, lift up on the
#1 Bow of the soft top to start the operation.
5. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link to
fold the soft top rearward into the Sunrider position.
Step Four
Step Five
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135
NOTE: If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider position,
secure the top by using the two velcro straps provided in
the center console.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Fully Lowered Position
1. From the Sunrider position, remove straps if previously
secured and move to the rear of the vehicle.
2. Locate the Sunrider latch beneath the #6 Bow of the soft
top on the driver’s side.
Secured Top When In Sunrider Position
Sunrider Latch Beneath #6 Bow
3
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the latch to release the top, and allow the soft top to
slide rearward freely in the guide tracks to the stowed
position.
4. While pushing downward slightly on the folded soft
top, slide the lock lever on the driver and passenger side
lift assist mechanisms to the “lock” position.
Step Three
Step Four (Locked Position)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137
5. Once the lock is in the “lock” position, push downward
on each side of the folded soft top to ensure it is secure.
An audible “click” may be heard.
Raising The Soft Top
Raising The Soft Top From The Fully Lowered Position
1. While pushing down on the rear of the top, slide the
lock lever on the driver and passenger side Lift Assist
Mechanisms to the “unlock” position.
Step Five
Unlocked Position
3
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along the guide
track until it locks into the Sunrider position with an
audible “click”.
4. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward the
front of the vehicle manually guiding the top into the
closed position.
Step Two
Lift From Side Link
3. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure the top is
locked in the Sunrider position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139
5. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header
latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver.
Repeat on the other side.
3
Lower Top Into Closed Position
Step Five
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the hook,
locking the latch into place.
Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of the
window into the retainer and slide forward while keeping the window level. Repeat on the other side.
Step Six
Step One
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into the top
cover, and insert the bottom tab into the clip.
3
Step Two
Step Two
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Engage the plastic retainers along the bottom of the
quarter window and up the front of the window. Repeat
on the other side.
Step Three
Install The Rear Window
1. Guide the rear window into the retainer from left to
right while keeping the window level.
Step One
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143
2. Insert the tailgate bar into the retainers at the bottom of
the window from left to the right.
3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right side
retainers.
3
Step Two
Step Three
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Line up the rear window to the passenger side quarter
window first, and engage the plastic retainers.
6. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right and
left corners.
5. Repeat with the driver’s side quarter window.
Step Six
Step Five
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145
POWER SLIDING TOP — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the
control switch can be found on the front trim panel, to the
right of the driver’s side sun visor.
• The Power Top is non-removable. If desired, the rear
quarter windows can be removed and stored in provided storage bags. Refer to “Quarter Window Removal” in this section for further information.
• The Power Top will not open in temperatures below
–4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened at a higher
temperature, it can be closed at temperatures above
–40°F (-40°C).
• The Power Top will not operate at vehicle speeds above
60 mph (96 km/h).
WARNING!
Power Sliding Top Control Switch
1 — Open Switch
2 — Close Switch
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power top
while operating the power top switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open power top. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers
are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the power top.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the power top opening.
Injury may result.
Opening The Power Top
Express Mode
Push the open switch and release it within one-half second.
The power top will open automatically to the open position. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open
operation, any movement of the open switch will stop the
power top.
Manual Mode
To open the power top manually, push and hold the open
switch. The power top will stop automatically at the open
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement.
The power top will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is pushed and held again.
Closing The Power Top
Express Mode
Push the close switch and release it within one-half second.
The power top will close fully and stop automatically. This
is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation,
any movement of the switch will stop the power top.
Manual Mode
To close the power top manually, push and hold the close
switch. The power top will move forward and automatically stop at the fully closed position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement. The power top will remain
in a partially closed position until the switch is pushed and
held again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the power top in certain open or partially open
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
then open the front and rear windows together to minimize
the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the power top
open, adjust the power top opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
power top during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the power top is detected, the power top
will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs. Next, push the close switch and release to Express
Close.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the power top
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
top’s path before closing.
NOTE: If three consecutive power top close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the power top must be closed in Manual Mode.
Power Top Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
quarter window glass panel.
Refer to “Bodywork” in Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information. It contains important information on
cleaning and caring for your vehicle.
Ignition Off Operation
The power top switch can remain active in Accessory Delay
for up to approximately 10 minutes after the vehicle’s
ignition is placed to the Off position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is a relearn
procedure that allows you to calibrate the power top when
the “Express Mode” stops working. To reset the power top,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
3
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Ensure the power top is in the fully closed position.
3. Push and hold the Close switch for 10 seconds. This will
put the power top into calibration mode.
4. Continue holding down the close button while the top
goes fully open and then back to fully close.
3. Locate the rear quarter window latches (one on each
window) on the interior of the windows.
4. Rotate the left hand side latch clockwise to release.
5. Rotate the right hand side latch counterclockwise to
release.
5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully closed
position, release the close button. The power top is now
reset and ready to use.
NOTE: If the close button is released anytime during the
relearning process, the relearn may not be complete, and
the procedure must be repeated.
Rear Quarter Window Removal
On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the rear
quarter windows can be removed. To remove these windows, follow the procedure below:
1. Open the swing gate, and lift the rear window.
2. Open both side doors nearest the quarter windows.
Rear Quarter Window Release Latches
1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwise
2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149
6. From the outside of the vehicle, lift each window
upward and away from the vehicle.
NOTE: Do not pull down or apply any weight to the
windows after the latches are released. Damage could
result to the pins holding the windows in place.
3
Quarter Window Pins Location
7. Store the rear quarter windows in the provided storage
bag and keep in a safe location, or securely fasten the
bag to the rear seat.
Lift Quarter Window Upward And Outward
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a structural
element that can provide some protection in some accidents. The windshield also provides some protection
against weather, road debris and intrusion of small
branches and other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down, as you lose the protection this structural element can
provide.
If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can be
folded down. However, the protection afforded by the
windshield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with
low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road
with the windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that required its
removal is completed and before you return to on-road
driving. Both you and your passengers should wear seat
belts at all times, on-road and off-road, regardless of
whether the windshield is raised or folded down.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you
choose to remove the doors, see an authorized dealer for a
replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law
requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against
personal injury:
• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down.
• Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at all
times when the windshield is down.
• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for
raising the windshield. Make sure that the folding
windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and all
associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and
tightly assembled before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent your
vehicle from providing you and your passengers’
protection in some accidents.
• If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door may
cause personal injury.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151
Lowering The Windshield
1. Lower the soft top or remove the hard top following the
instructions in this manual.
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, remove the
four Torx screws located along the interior of the windshield.
2. Manually remove the protective caps over the windshield wiper hex bolts.
3
Interior Torx Screw Locations
NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt
3. Using the provided 15mm socket, remove the two hex
bolts and remove the wiper arms.
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both sun
visors.
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the footman loop bumpers (if equipped).
Raising The Windshield
1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in the
lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, reinstall the
four Torx screws located along the interior of the windshield. Secure them until they are snug, being careful
not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Footman Loop Bumpers
1 — Bumper
2 — Footman Loop
3 — Washer Nozzle
7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through
the footman loops on either side of the hood and on the
windshield frame. Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place.
Interior Torx Screw Locations
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms and using the
provided 15mm socket, reinstall the two hex bolts
securing the wiper arms. Secure them until they are
snug, careful not to over tighten.
HOOD
Opening The Hood
Release both the hood latches.
3
5. Replace the protective caps over the wiper arm hex bolts
and push gently until they snap into place.
Hood Latch Locations
Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the
middle of the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the
left side of the vehicle, to open the hood. You may have to
push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety
latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood.
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing The Hood
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood
panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood
slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Swing Gate Handle
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key,
Remote Keyless Entry key fob, by activating the power
door lock switches located on the front doors, or grabbing
the handle if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go.
To open the swing gate, pull on the gate handle.
NOTE: Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to
close the swing gate (hard top models only).
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and
your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flip-up window closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155
CAUTION!
Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing the rear
flip-up window, as damage to the blade will result.
Cargo Area Features
To install the adjustable slide, proceed as follows:
1. Place the slide into the rail while in the horizontal
position. Then rotate the slide 90 degrees into the
vertical position, securing it into the rail. Repeat on the
other side.
Trail Rail Cargo Organizer — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trail Rail system, a rail
will be found built into the floor on either side of the cargo
area. An organizer bar fits into slides in the rail to create an
adjustable barrier.
Installing Adjustable Slides
1 — Place In Rail Horizontally
2 — Rotate 90° To Lock In Place
2. Lower the organizer bar into the holes on the top of each
slide, locking them in place.
Trail Rail Organizer Bar
3
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Adjust the bar to the desired position by sliding the bar
up or down the rails.
4. To lock the slides in place, using your auxiliary key from
your key fob, insert the key into the keyhole on the
rearward end of the slide and turn to lock.
Lower Bar Into Slides — Slide To Adjust
Use Auxiliary Key To Lock Slides
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 157
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
The HomeLink buttons, located on the overhead console,
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
3
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE: It is NOT the button that is normally used to open
and close the door. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.⬙
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Press and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you press and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non-Rolling
Code)
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 161
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button, while
you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
NOTE:
Using HomeLink
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
3
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 163
General Information
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Storage
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Glove Compartment
3
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage Compartment
Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped
To lock or unlock the storage compartment, insert the
ignition key and turn. To open the storage compartment,
pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
The rear cargo area storage compartment is located underneath the load floor.
To access the storage compartment, lift up on the cover
cutout at the rear of the cargo area.
Center Console
Rear Storage Cover
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 165
Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center
console, near the floor.
3
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There are also cupholders located in the rear seat armrest,
if equipped.
Electrical Power Outlets
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets that
can provide power for accessories designed for use with
the standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls, and is powered from the ignition switch. Power is available when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Rear Seat Armrest Cupholders
Front Power Outlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 167
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a
second power outlet located in the rear cargo area and is
powered directly from the vehicle battery.
3
Power Outlets Fuse Locations
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
1 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at all
times)
2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position)
168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 169
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 or 230 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located
on the back of the center console to convert DC current to
AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter
3
170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped
Four auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank of
the instrument panel can be used to power various electrical devices. You have the ability to configure the functionality of the auxiliary switches via the Uconnect settings. All
switches can be configured for setting the switch type
operation to latching or momentary, power source of either
battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key
cycles.
Auxiliary Switches
NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch
type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
For more information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
Multimedia.”
The auxiliary switches control relays that power four blunt
cut wires located in the interior passenger outboard foot
well area and on the right side of the engine compartment
near the battery.
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 171
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models
ONLY.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lbs (45 kg), this includes
the weight of the crossbars, and it should be uniformly
distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed
on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Passenger Side Panel
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused
battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the
interior, in the passenger outboard foot well area.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided with
the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/installation
of your electrical devices.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and
luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
3
172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
(Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ White Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Green Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Blue Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items . . . . . .181
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver
Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Red Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Yellow Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Gray Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .199
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
4
174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
4
Premium Instrument Cluster
176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions
WARNING!
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call your authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer
in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call your
authorized dealer for service.
2. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driverinteractive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.
5. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer
in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driverinteractive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call your authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats.
4
178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call your
authorized dealer for service.
through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display is located in the center of
the instrument cluster.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t.
The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster Display Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
4
7.0 Inch Instrument Cluster Display Location
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
OK Button
Up Arrow Button
Right Arrow Button
Down Arrow Button
Left Arrow Button
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Off Road— If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip Info
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Oil Change Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle
between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow
button to scroll through the information submenus and
push and release the OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus.
• Tire Pressure
• Transmission
Temperature — Automatic
Transmission Only
• Oil Temperature
• Battery Voltage
• Coolant Temperature
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
4
182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Off Road
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Off
Road menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to
scroll through the information submenus.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and hold the OK button to reset average fuel
economy feature.
• Drivetrain
Toggle left or right to select a display with or without
Current Fuel Economy Information.
• Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and numerical value of calculated average front wheel angle from
the steering wheel orientation.
• Transfer Case Lock Status: displays ⬙Lock⬙ graphic only
during 4WD High, 4WD High Part Time, 4WD Low
status.
• Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped): displays
front and rear or rear only axle locker graphic, and sway
bar connection graphic with text message (connected or
disconnected).
• Pitch And Roll
• Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the graphic
with the angle number on the screen.
NOTE: When vehicle speed becomes too high to display
the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers,
and the graphic will be greyed out.
• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi
or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in
the tank. When the Range value is less than 10 miles, the
Range display will change to a “LOW” message. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the “LOW” message and a new Range value will display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
• Average – The display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.
• Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Trip Info
• Phone Call Status
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display, then push and release the left or right arrow
button to select Trip A or Trip B.
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will
display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the
phone is answered or ignored.
• Distance
NOTE: The call status will temporarily replace the previous media source information displayed on the screen.
When the pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will
return to the last used screen.
• Average Fuel Economy
Messages
• Elapsed Time
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right arrow
button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following:
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. The screen will display the Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This menu will display the audio source
information, including the Song name, Artist name, and
audio source with an accompanying graphic.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope, and “No Stored Messages” will display.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen
as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
4
184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Average MPG
Upper Left
• Current MPG
• None
• Trip A Distance
• Compass (default setting)
• Trip B Distance
• Outside Temp
• Audio
• Time
• Speedometer
• Range To Empty
• Menu Title (default setting)
• Average MPG
Upper Right
• Current MPG
• None
• Trip A Distance
• Compass
• Trip B Distance
• Outside Temp (default setting)
Center
• Time
• None
• Range To Empty
• Compass
• Average MPG
• Outside Temp
• Current MPG
• Time
• Trip A Distance
• Range to Empty
• Trip B Distance
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Gear Display — If Equipped
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
• Full (default setting)
• Cancel
• Single
• Restore
Current Gear
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press OK
button to choose show or hide this menu on the instrument
cluster display.
• On
• Off (default setting)
Odometer — If Equipped
• Show (default setting)
• Hide
Favorite Menus
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Off Road – If Equipped (show/hide)
• Fuel Economy (show/hide)
• Trip Info (Show/Hide)
• Stop/Start
• Audio (show/hide)
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
4
186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery Saver
On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Warning Lights And Messages” located in ”Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 150W Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
consoles and similar devices.
• The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
150W, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light indicates a fault with the air bag, and will turn on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
4
188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including
brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the
brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by your authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging
properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This light will turn on when there’s a fault with the EPS
(Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power Steering”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition
when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
4
190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will be
sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool:
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If
Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open
and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this
light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt
is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Swing Gate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the swing gate is open.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in
PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
4
192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will indicate when the Electronic Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when
ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running.
If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose.
Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the
light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal (7.5 L),
this light will turn on and a chime will sound. The light
will remain on until fuel is added.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer
fluid is low.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means
that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest
service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
— Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system
is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact
your authorized dealer for service.
— Speed Control Fault Warning Light
This telltale will illuminate to indicate the Speed Control
System is not functioning properly and service is required.
Contact your authorized dealer.
— Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a fault in the sway
bar disconnect system.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
(Continued)
4
196 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
Yellow Indicator Lights
/
— 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
/
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased
torque at the wheels.
/
— 4WD Part Time Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive part time mode, and the front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
— Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when there is a fault detected with
the Active Speed Limiter.
— Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front and/or rear axle locker
fault has been detected.
— Front/Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front, rear, or both axles have
been locked. The telltale will display the lock icon either on
the front, rear, or both axles to indicate the current lock
status.
/
— Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the neutral
mode.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
— Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been
activated.
— Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front sway bar is
disconnected.
— 4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive auto mode. The system will provide
power to all four wheels and shift the power between the
front and rear axles as needed. This will provide maximum
traction in dry and slippery conditions.
White Indicator Lights
— Two Wheel Drive High Indicator Light —
If Equipped With a Premium Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the two
wheel drive high mode.
— Active Speed Limiter ON Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on,
but not set.
— Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on
and set to a specific speed.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is
in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met
while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
— Set Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed warning
telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster with a
number matching the set speed. When the set speed is
exceeded, a single chime will sound along with pop up
message of speed warning exceeded. When the set speed is
exceeded by 1.8 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indication will
light up yellow and flash along with a continuous chime
(up to ten seconds or until the speed is no longer exceeded). Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the
4
198 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
instrument cluster display, for further information refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel.”
The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can be
set.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed control has been
turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Green Indicator Lights
— 4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive auto mode. The system will provide
power to all four wheels and shift the power between the
front and rear axles as needed. This will provide maximum
traction in dry and slippery conditions.
— Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A 7.0 Instrument Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on
and set to a specific speed.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the speed control is set to the
desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are
on.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is
in “Autostop” mode.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on.
With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the
high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward
the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the
high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a
temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
Gray Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed control has been
turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Active Speed Limiter ON Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on,
but not set.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
4
200 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
(Continued)
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
4
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . .243
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .217
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . .225
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . .231
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
5
204 SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
205
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), and Hill
Descent Control (HDC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
5
206 SAFETY
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed. (If the doors are attached,
then the door must be closed. If the doors are detached
then the driver’s seatbelt must be buckled.)
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
207
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
5
208 SAFETY
Towing With HSA
Traction Control System (TCS)
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
SAFETY
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
209
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
(Continued)
5
210 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to return
to ESC On.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
SAFETY
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if so
equipped.
211
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
5
212 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
SAFETY
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
213
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
5
214 SAFETY
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and
Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides
torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to
help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity
and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).
SAFETY
215
Enabling HDC
HDC Target Set Speeds
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• Parking brake is released.
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• Driver door is closed. (If doors are attached, then door
must be closed. if doors are detached, then driver
seatbelt must be buckled.)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed
for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
5
216 SAFETY
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
• Driver door opens (Driver door opens if doors are
attached or driver seatbelt is unbuckled if doors are
detached).
Deactivating HDC
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,
is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
SAFETY
217
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles,
etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
5
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
218 SAFETY
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
The area on taillights, where the radar sensors are located,
must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination
so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the taillights where the radar sensors are located with
foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of seconds).
BSM Radar Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
SAFETY
219
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
5
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
220 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
SAFETY
221
5
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Stationary Objects
222 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
223
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury
or death.
5
224 SAFETY
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
SAFETY
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
225
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
5
226 SAFETY
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be
on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance. Customers are
encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure TPMS
feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
SAFETY
227
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
5
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire pressure monitoring telltale light
228 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more
of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message for a minimum of
five seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
SAFETY
229
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can
occur due to any of the following:
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
key cycle, the TPMS Telltale Light will remain on and a
chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a different color pressure
value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “Service
Tire Pressure System” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does
not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
spare tire.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or
non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
5
230 SAFETY
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Vehicles With a Full Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped
with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is
swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next ignition
switch cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light to be on, a chime to sound, an Inflate to XX
message to appear in the instrument cluster, and the
graphic display will still show the low tire pressure
value in a different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) will turn off the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light as long as none of road tires are below the
low pressure warning threshold.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message
and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--)
will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPM Telltale
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off.
The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display pressure
SAFETY
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
⬙SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
General Information
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
• Seat Belt Systems
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Child Restraints
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
231
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
5
232 SAFETY
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
SAFETY
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
233
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
5
234 SAFETY
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
(Continued)
SAFETY
235
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
5
236 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
SAFETY
237
5
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
238 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
SAFETY
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
239
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
5
240 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
SAFETY
241
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
5
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(Four-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(Two-Door Models)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
242 SAFETY
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to
retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
SAFETY
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag Warning Light
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
243
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a
self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert
you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
5
244 SAFETY
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. For additional information
regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
245
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
5
246 SAFETY
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed to
activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is
designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose seated
weight classifies them in a category other than a properly
seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an
adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light (an
amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the
driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light
illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to
show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
deploy during a collision.
NOTE: When the front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is
NOT illuminated.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
247
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the
occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat
5
248 SAFETY
and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a
category other than a properly seated adult. This could be
a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of
The Following:
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. In order for the OCS to
operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger
to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Facing forward.
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor located in the front passenger seat
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor.
• Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an
amber light located on the overhead sports bar
• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the seat
back in an upright position.
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on
the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether it should activate or deactivate the
Seated Properly
SAFETY
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light
objects in it.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a child, including a child seated in a forward-facing child restraint or
booster seat.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child or small adult.
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
249
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Front Passenger Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Advanced Air
Air Bag Status
Status
Bag Disabled
Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Unoccupied
NOT
DEACTIVATED
seat* Unbuckled ILLUMINATED
Unoccupied
“PASSENGER
DEACTIVATED
seat*Buckled
AIR BAG OFF”
Grocery bags,
“PASSENGER
DEACTIVATED
heavy briefcases, AIR BAG OFF”
and other relatively light objects
Rear-facing child “PASSENGER
DEACTIVATED
restraint**
AIR BAG OFF”
5
250 SAFETY
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Front Passenger Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Advanced Air
Air Bag Status
Status
Bag Disabled
Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Child, including “PASSENGER
DEACTIVATED
a child in a
AIR BAG OFF”
forward-facing
child restraint or
booster seat**
Small adult
“PASSENGER
DEACTIVATED
AIR BAG OFF”
Properly seated
NOT ILLUMIACTIVATED
adult
NATED
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is
unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
deploy even though the PAD System Indicator Light is
NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger
seat and never install a child restraint system, including a
rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD
Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag will not deploy during a collision. When the front
passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are
SAFETY
placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an
adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger
seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify that the
PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is
riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated
properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may
deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated
for most properly seated and restrained children in the
passenger seat and for most properly installed child restraint systems. However, under certain conditions, even
with a properly installed child restraint system, the PAD
Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even though the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can
occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest weight
necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light. NEVER
assume the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
251
NOTE: If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the
PAD Indicator Light will illuminate.
If The Pad Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult
Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat
and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to allow
the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight to
activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step
out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat,
such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers,
blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat,
with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or near the
floor, and with their back against the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in
this seated position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
5
252 SAFETY
WARNING!
• If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for
an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag will not deploy in the event of a collision.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be activated for a
lighter weight passenger, including a small adult (depending on size) who is seated in the passenger seat. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deactivated. If
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front
passenger seat, have the passenger reposition his or her
body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s
Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in deactivation
or activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
SAFETY
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight
on the front passenger seat may result in deactivation of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious
injury or death. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in activation
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of
improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
5
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to
face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and
center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
253
Not Seated Properly
254 SAFETY
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY
255
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
Not Seated Properly
will illuminate whenever
The Air Bag Warning Light
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status.
WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the
does not
air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light
come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
5
256 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
• If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that
you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the
seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly,
or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs
service for any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
SAFETY
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
257
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn
into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
5
258 SAFETY
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Side Impacts
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Location
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
(Continued)
259
WARNING! (Continued)
against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
5
260 SAFETY
Air Bag System Components
If A Deployment Occurs
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
SAFETY
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
261
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
NOTE:
• Unlock the power door locks.
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Turn off the Gasoline Fuel Pump Heater (if equipped) or
the Diesel Fuel Filter Heater (if equipped).
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
• Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.
• Close the HVAC Circulation Door.
5
262 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
SAFETY
263
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Child Restraints
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
5
264 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website
for
additional
information:
http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
SAFETY
265
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint
Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type
Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
5
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
266 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
WARNING! (Continued)
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is
recommended for children from birth until they reach the
weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child
seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they
can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
SAFETY
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
267
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt
alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
5
268 SAFETY
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not
protect a child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
LATCH Label
269
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
5
270 SAFETY
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
271
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system
weight + weight of the child reuntil the combined weight of the
straint) for using the LATCH anchorchild and the child restraint is 65 lbs
age system to attach the child re(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
straint?
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
No
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
restraint?
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
5
272 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can a child seat be installed in the
Two Door Models- No
Four Door Only: You can install child
center position using the inner
Four Door Models - Yes
restraints with flexible lower anchors
LATCH lower anchorages?
in the center position. The inner anchorages are 18.5 inches (484 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the
center position.
Can two child restraints be attached
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If
using a common lower LATCH anchorage?
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
SAFETY
273
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of
touch the back of the front passenger
the front passenger seat if the child
seat?
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models- No
Two Door Models — None
Four Door Models - Yes
Four Door Models — Center only
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front
of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the
head restraint in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
5
274 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
SAFETY
275
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Two-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat, near the floor.
5
Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
Four-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating
position located on the back of the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
276 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING! (Continued)
Two-Door Models:
Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Four-Door Models:
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you must
use the seat belt for the center position. You can then
use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt
for installing child seats in the outboard positions.
(Continued)
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
SAFETY
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
277
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
5
278 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
SAFETY
279
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
5
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Four-Door Models)
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Two-Door Models)
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
280 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward
recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is alseat?
lowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models- No
Two Door — None
Four Door Models - Yes
Four Door — Center Only
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seatCan the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
ing position with an ALR retractor.
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front
of it.
SAFETY
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who
is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head
restraint in its lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
281
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
5
282 SAFETY
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
283
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
5
284 SAFETY
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models With Center Armrest)
Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door Without
Center Armrest
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint.
SAFETY
285
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models Without Center Armrest)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
center tether anchorage located on the back of the seat.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
5
286 SAFETY
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
SAFETY
287
Air Bag Warning Light
Floor Mat Safety Information
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is removed.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
5
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
(Continued)
288 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat
for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat
interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the
vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
(Continued)
SAFETY
289
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are
detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .306
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .294
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .294
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .307
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .308
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
䡵 FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .299
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .299
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .302
▫ Four-Position Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Five-Position Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models . . . . . .323
▫ Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped . .324
䡵 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING . . . .325
▫ Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ Downshifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
6
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . .328
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .329
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .329
▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . .331
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Start/Stop System . . .332
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .332
▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .340
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .341
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA . . . . . . . .343
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Towing Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .356
▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
䡵 DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
6
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking
ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether or
not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature
enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to
start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal.
The “4WD Low Indicator Light” will illuminate when the
transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK
position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply
the brake before shifting to any driving range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle stopped)
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the transmission will automatically select PARK and the
engine will turn off, however the ignition will remain in
the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the START/
STOP button once will turn the engine off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the
engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode
(NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when
the transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE: The system will automatically time out and the
ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine
not running) mode and the transmission is in PARK.
6
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC mode (instrument cluster will
display “ACC”),
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN mode (instrument
cluster will display “ON/RUN”),
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument cluster
will display “OFF”).
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. If the ⴖPⴖ
indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into
PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
• Vehicle is not in PARK
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (2.0 km/h) or less
• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
• Drivers door is ajar or in conditions where driver door is
removed an additional trigger would be if the driver is
off the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing).
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
• Ignition switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE: For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will
turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode.
After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
• Drivers door is ajar or in conditions where driver door is
removed an aditional trigger would be if the driver is off
the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing).
• Driver’s door is removed
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift
to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the
shifter must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH
(2.0 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P”
will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed
is above 1.2 MPH (2.0 km/h).
6
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (2.0 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
4WD LOW
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver’s Door is ajar
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will
continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the
Driver’s Door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the ⬙P⬙ in the instrument cluster
display and on the shifter. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
bundled in front of the battery tray.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
6
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake
is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To
apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
6
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms
up. This is normal.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal
wear on the clutch.
Manual Transmission Shifter
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place the
gear selector into the desired gear position (the diagram for
the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle of
the selector).
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift
the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the
gear selector all the way left and then forward.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle
is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch
pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The
noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a
problem with your clutch or transmission.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
Shift Pattern
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded
or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift speeds
may not apply.
6
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine
3.6L
Speeds
Accel.
Cruise
Manual Transmission
1 to 2
15 (24)
10 (16)
Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
2 to 3
3 to 4
24 (39)
50 (80)
19 (31)
40 (64)
NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H
and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly
less.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills.
In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better
acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the
engine and clutch.
NOTE: Above certain speeds downshifts may be blocked
and not available.
4 to 5
65 (104)
55 (88)
5 to 6
70 (112)
65 (105)
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at
higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and
clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear
with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to
the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and
releasing the clutch may result in engine damage.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer
case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause
engine and clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/or
damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage.
Gear Selection
Maximum Speed
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
6 to 5
5 to 4
4 to 3
3 to 2
80 (129)
70 (113)
50 (81)
30 (48)
NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H
and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly
less.
6
2 to 1
15 (24)
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
WARNING! (Continued)
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
NOTE: The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will
be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the
ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the
vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must
also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
6
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To
shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster. Refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
Gear Selector
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward),
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake,
Gear Ranges
• Shift the transmission into PARK,
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
• Turn the ignition OFF and,
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
6
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
WARNING! (Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK
position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector
to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
6
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual control of transmission shifting
(also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
6
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the
MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The
current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear
selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually shift the
transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-) while in
the MANUAL (M) position will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward
(+) will command an upshift.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear (or
third gear, in 4LO range). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second or
third gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE: When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is
not active.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Four-Position Transfer Case
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
6
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
• 4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
• N (Neutral)
• 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions, such as
hard-surfaced roads.
NEUTRAL (N)
In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer
case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are
intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not
intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L
positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire
wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to
“Shifting Procedures” in this section for further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are
locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into the 4H position.
4L
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Shifting Procedures
2H To 4H Or 4H To 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would
be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the
shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the transfer case.
Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case
lever.
NOTE:
• Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft
speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting
while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can
cause damage to the transfer case.
• Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
• Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.
6
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is
normal.
4H To 4L Or 4L To 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an
automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case
lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the
transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed,
place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
Five-Position Transfer Case
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid
attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
The transfer case provides five mode positions:
• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
• 4H Auto (Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range)
• 4H PT (Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range)
• N (Neutral)
• 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system will
be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
4H P-T
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces
only.
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel
drive position (2WD) or four-wheel drive position (4WD
AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on dry
hard surfaced roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have
greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not
engaged in 2WD.
6
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD
mode.
In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer
case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are
intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not
intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L
positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire
wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to
“Shifting Procedures” in this section for further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are
locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Shifting Procedures
NOTE:
2H To 4H Auto Or 4H Auto To 2H
• Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft
speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting
while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can
cause damage to the transfer case.
Shifting between 2H and 4H Auto can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed
would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
2H/4H Auto To 4H Part Time Or 4H Part Time To 2H/4H
Auto
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME can be
made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred
shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage
faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
• Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
• Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is
normal.
4H Part Time/4H Auto To 4L Or 4L To 4H Part Time/4H
Auto
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an
automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case
lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the
6
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed,
place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid
attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to
both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss
of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs between
the two rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the
wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum
traction.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential,
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control
of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel
(to the right of the steering column).
This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met:
• Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
• Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down
to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will illuminate), push the switch up to lock the front axle and rear
axle (the “FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear
axle is locked, pushing the bottom of switch again will lock
or unlock the front axle.
NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are
fully locked or unlocked.
Axle Lock Switch Panel
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
(Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
The axle lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle
speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
6
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater
front suspension travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located
on the instrument panel (to the right of the steering
column).
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push
the switch again to deactivate the system. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash during activation transition, or
when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal
driving conditions.
WARNING!
Sway Bar Switch
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before
driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above
18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar
may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury. Under certain circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar enhances vehicle
stability and assists with vehicle control. The system
monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect
the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over 18 mph
(29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or solid
“Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once vehicle speed is
reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system will once
again attempt to return to off-road mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H or
4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road
position. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this
section for further information. The “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been
fully disconnected.
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
to left and right suspension height differences. This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading.
In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/
reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be
aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be
driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch
again.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash in the
instrument cluster and vehicle stability may be reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph
(29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a
disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the
loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious
injury.
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The
system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and good feel while driving. If the electrohydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
6
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically
driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system. Normal
operation will resume once the system is allowed to
cool.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a flashing icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer
exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and
let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these
conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
NOTE: It is recommended that the Start/Stop System be
disabled during off-road use.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Automatic Mode
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if
all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine
will not stop:
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable
cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
6
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Hood is open.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
• Transfer case is in 4LO or Neutral
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake
pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The
transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• Vehicle speed threshold not achieved from previous
auto-stop (2 mph (3 km/h) BSG, 5 mph (8 km/h) ESS
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
• Vehicle is at high altitude
• System fault present
• Low fuel is detected
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times
without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications).
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time exceeds 5 minutes.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO or Neutral mode.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back
on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
STOP/START Off Switch
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
6
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED)
To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Mode,
The Following Must Occur:
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Pressing the clutch pedal will automatically restart the
vehicle.
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: It is recommended that the Start/Stop System be
disabled during off-road use.
• Vehicle speed must be less 2 mph (3 km/h).
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. It will remain in
STOP/START NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h). At that time, the system will go into STOP/
START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go
into an STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode.
• The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position and
the clutch pedal must be fully released
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will fall to the
Stop/Start position, the STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will appear, and the heater/air conditioning
(HVAC) air flow will be reduced.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. In
following situations the engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) or greater
than 109°F (43°C).
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• Battery discharged.
• When driving in REVERSE.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine will
start when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not require
complete/full pedal press). The vehicle will go into STOP/
START SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Hood is open.
Conditions that will cause the engine to start automatically while in STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode
• Transfer case is in 4LO or Neutral
The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
• Driver’s seat is not occupied or driver door is open.
• Vehicle is at high altitude.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• Forward Gear is engaged.
• STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time exceeds 5
minutes.
• System fault is present.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low fuel is detected.
• Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake pedal applications.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times
without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
• Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
• 4LO or Neutral (transfer case)
6
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Manually Turn Off The Start/Stop System
1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
4. If the STOP/START system is manually turned off, the
engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the
ignition switch
5. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the key is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
STOP/START Off Switch
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system), the engine will not be stopped.
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control On/Off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Speed Control Buttons
1 — SET+/Accel
2 — On/Off
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
6
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
To Decrease Speed
To Accelerate For Passing
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Resume Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to OFF,
erases the set speed from memory.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
6
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
6
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster
display will show the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime
Radio
Volume
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 inches 47-39 inches
(150-120 cm) (120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
None
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
None
None
None
None
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
None
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Fast
Yes
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
6
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the climate
controls.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will show the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense OFF, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
6
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deactivated when the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the
vehicle’s tow hook socket. The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the trailer’s cable plug is removed.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle in the center of
the spare tire.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
image will continue to be displayed for up to ten seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK
or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
6
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
Fuel Filler Cap
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Fuel Filler Door
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel filler
cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap
can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
WARNING!
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being
filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations and
may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place gas containers on the ground
while filling.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap about 1/4 turn until you hear
one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
6
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction,
the “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display.
Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is
an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the
odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is
detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL.
Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
6
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Common Towing Definitions
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control – If Equipped
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue.
It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
6
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/
Transmission
2.0L
3.6L
GCWR
Max. GTW
(Gross ComModel
Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer
bined Wt.
Wt.)
Rating)
Two–Door
8,016 lbs (3
20 ft2 (1.86 m2)
2,000 lbs
636 kg)
(907 kg)
Four–Door
8,117 lbs (3
30 ft2 (2.79 m2)
3,500 lbs (1
682 kg)
587 kg)
Two–Door
8,016 lbs (3
20 ft2 (1.86 m2)
2,000 lbs
636 kg)
(907 kg)
Four–Door
8,117 lbs (3
30 ft2 (2.79 m2)
3,500 lbs (1
682 kg)
587 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the
GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight
referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information.
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
200 lbs (91 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
6
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
6
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
Towing Tips
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and
backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
6
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
•
•
•
•
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Front
Rear
ALL
Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK.
Manual transmission in gear (NOT
in NEUTRAL [N]).
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N).
Tow in forward direction.
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N), automatic transmission must be in PARK, and manual
transmission must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer
case.
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in
Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
6
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine OFF.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is
no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine OFF.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
DRIVING TIPS
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
On-Road Driving Tips
6. Turn the engine OFF.
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than conventional passenger cars.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
NOTE: When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL
(N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal
(and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check
that the vehicle operates normally.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in offroad conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
6
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Off-Road Driving Tips
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
2. Remove both nuts from the underside of the vehicle for
each bracket.
NOTE: Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage if so equipped.
1. There are two studs on the bodyside of each connecting
bracket.
Underside Nuts
3. Remove the side step assembly.
Bodyside Studs
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Bumper End Cap Removal
The end caps on your vehicle’s front bumper can be
removed by following the steps below:
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR bracket
(Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap using a T45 torx bit
screw driver. Do not remove the bolts.
6
Bolt #2
2. Remove the remaining 8 bolts. The end cap can now be
expanded open.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and store it
where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
Bolt #1
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so
always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain
a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns
or braking. In most cases, there are no road signs, posted
speed limits or signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use
your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not.
When on a trail, you should always be looking ahead for
surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan
your future driving route while remembering what you are
currently driving over.
NOTE: It is recommended that the Start/Stop System be
disabled during off-road use.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle exhaust
system could cause a fire.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road
situation.
When To Use 4L (Low) Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low speed
pulling power. This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand
where additional low speed pulling power is needed.
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
avoided when in 4L (Low) range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the vehicle on
dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking
may cause skidding and loss of control.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous
use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving). When
climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and
the transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to
a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Overrevving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be
lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering
wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth,
while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get
a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use second
gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) position to
maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes
pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting
stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous
vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before entering
any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if
there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
safely recovered if stuck.
6
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Sand
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The key to
driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure,
accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are going to be
driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire
pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a
greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on
the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal air
pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to
reducing the pressure.
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types
of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to
determine the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a
firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it
makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly
while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle
up and over the object.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of your
vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Using A Spotter
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or
determine the correct path. Determining the correct path
can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many
obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you over,
through, or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a
safe distance in front of you where they can see the
obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and guide
you through.
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree
angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need to use caution when crossing large
obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any
large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to
put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in a
rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45-degree
angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to fill
the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You should
now be able to drive out following the trench you just
created at a 45-degree angle.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires.
This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The
tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall
and is designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and
make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CAUTION!
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage.
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
6
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing Logs
CAUTION!
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of
the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to
climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel
confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should
always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to
climb a hill on an angle.
Getting High-Centered
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung
up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the
best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what
you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few
rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point
when you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the
vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is on
the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is
on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or
other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the
vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good
and you feel confident, shift the transmission into a lower
gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and proceed with caution,
maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Driving Up Hill
Driving Downhill
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up
for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy
constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the
hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the abrupt
change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the front
end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring
all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest
of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the
top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of
a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly
back and forth. This will provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the
surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the
vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade
using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine if
it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent?
Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain
control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel confident
in your ability to proceed, then make sure you are in 4L
(Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to
control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but
do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases
the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
6
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an
incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which
increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover.
Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and
stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep
hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking
to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary,
but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across
a hill, always drive straight up or down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only be
attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible manner.
You should only drive through areas which are designated
and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage
to the environment. You should know your vehicle’s
abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong.
You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing
deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air
intake. If the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any
crossing is low and slow. Shift into first gear (manual
transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the
transfer case in the 4L (Low) position and proceed very
slowly with a constant slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8
km/h) maximum} and light throttle. Keep the vehicle
moving; do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After
crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle
differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for
signs of water ingestion.
CAUTION!
• Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
vehicle components, and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy.
• When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward.
Driving through water may cause damage that may
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine if
you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out
and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You need
to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and bottom
condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters; check for
hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding on any
wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key
to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and bottom
conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to
consider this when determining the depth and the ability to
safely cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to
entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle
recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross,
than proceed using the low and slow method.
6
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at risk
of injury or drowning.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to
cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water.
Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream,
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water, a high
current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires
putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high
risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water
currents in depths greater than the vehicle’s running ground
clearance. You should never attempt to cross flowing water
which is deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance.
Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough to
push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body. Before
you proceed, determine the speed of the current, the water’s
depth, approach angle, bottom condition and if there are any
obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream
using the low and slow technique.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
NOTE: Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual transmission bell housing for mud and debris and clean as
required.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .374
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
䡵 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .374
䡵 JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ Power Distribution Center (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Four–Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . .411
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .411
7
374 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
7
376 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 377
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable
network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable network and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.
An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
7
378 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
WARNING!
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 379
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
7
380 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp
Heater Control Lamps (2)
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger,
and Rear Wash/Wipe)
Soundbar Dome Lamp
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Bulb Number
658
194
**
912
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (2)
Premium Head Lamps
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2)
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2)
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp
Front Side Marker Lamps (2)
Base Fog Lamps
Bulb Number
H13
LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
7442NALL
LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
7440NA
7443
LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
PSX24W
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 381
Premium Fog Lamps
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
License Lamp
LED –
LED –
LED –
LED –
LED –
Bulb Number
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
3157
7440
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Bulb Replacement
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Halogen Headlamps
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the top
1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the headlamp to the
vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
7
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
connector locking tab to the lock position.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn clockwise.
Front Park/Turn Signal
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access bulb
sockets.
Wheel Liner
2. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise and
remove from housing. Pull the bulb straight from the
socket to replace.
LED Front Side Marker
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access side
maker screw and electrical connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the front side
maker assembly and disconnect electrical connector.
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker light assembly.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
Halogen Front Fog Lamp
LED Front Fog Lamp
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front
fog lamp.
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they are
replaced as an assembly.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front
fog lamp connector receptacle.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access single retaining
screw for tail lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the
housing and then connect the replacement bulb.
7
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Trim Cap
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect electrical connector, then remove tail lamp assembly from the vehicle.
NOTE: If necessary, push in on the assembly tab located
inboard behind the lamp housing.
Assembly Bracket
4. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise, then remove it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
Retaining Screw
3. Remove the three screws from assembly bracket to
access bulb sockets.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends
upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire. If service is
needed, obtain the LED Assembly from an authorized
dealer.
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier cover.
3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly and disconnect
electrical connector.
License Plate Lamps
See an authorized dealer to replace these LED assemblies.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
Power Distribution Center (PDC)
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The PDC top cover is
labelled with each serviceable fuse/relay location, function, and size.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Power Distribution Center
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown
fuse).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
Cavity
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
–
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
–
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
–
–
15 Amp Blue
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
Description
Spare
Starter
IBS
Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
Security Gateway
Spare
LTR Cool Pump — If Equipped
TCM-8HP CYGNUS
Spare
KIN/RF HUB/ESCL
UCI Port (USB & AUX)
HIFI Amplifier
Spare
Spare
IPC/SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC
Spare
Spare
AC CLUTCH
Spare
CBC 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
7
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F21
F22
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
–
Micro Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp
–
10 Amp
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp
10 Amp
10 Amp
10 Amp
–
–
–
–
–
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Description
REAR WIPER
ECM/PCM/MGU WAKE UP/
PPU WAKE UP
PCM/ECM
Spare
MOD_SBW
CBC 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
Front Wipers
CBC 3-POWER LOCKS
CBC 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
Spare
DIAGNOSTIC PORT
HVAC CTRL MOD/SCL/OCM/DPDM
PTS/IRCM/AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS
ESC/EHPS/SBCM WAKE UP
BRAKE VAC PMP — If Equipped
TRLR TOW MOD — If Equipped
TRLR TOW CONN 7W — If Equipped
ECM
Spare
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
Cavity
F40
F41
F42
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
F43
F44
F45
F46
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F47
F48
F49
F50
F51
F52
F53
F54
F55
F56
F57
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
DTCM/AXLE LOCK FT_RR
IC/SGW WAKE UP
PCR CTRL FEED (ESS)/SPARE (BSG) —
If Equipped
PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
IRCAM HEATERS
PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN*
AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/
HDLP SW
Spare
Spare
ORC
HD ACC — If Equipped
DSRC/USB/ISRVM/CSGM
CIGAR LTR
Spare
Spare
Spare
IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR
Frt Drvr Htd Seat
7
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F58
F59
F60
F61
F62
F63
F64
F65
F66
F67
F68
F69
F70
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
–
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
25 Amp Clear
F71
F72
F73
F74
F75
F76
–
–
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Frt Pass Htd Seat
Spare
CSWM (HTD STR WHEEL)
LBSS/RBSS
Spare
ORC
Spare
Spare
HVAC BLOWER MTR FRT
Spare
Spare
MGU (BSG) — If Equipped
INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD
(DSL)
Spare
HD ELEC ACC PKG — If Equipped
PWR TOP LT
PWR TOP RT
PPU-BPCM & APM (BSG) — If Equipped
ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
Cavity
F77
F78
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F79
F80
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
F86
F87
F88
F89
F90
F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
–
–
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
–
30 Amp Pink
–
20 Amp Blue
–
20 Amp Blue
–
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
10 Amp Red
–
10 Amp Red
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
Description
HTD MIRRORS
COMP/INTRUSION/SIREN/INTRUSION
SNSRS
SMART BAR CTRL MOD
PCM
REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)
FUEL HTR — If Equipped
GLOW PLUG — If Equipped
UREA HTR CTRL UNIT — If Equipped
PM SENSOR — If Equipped
BRAKE VAC PMP 2 — If Equipped
SUPPLY/PURGING PMP — If Equipped
NOx SENSOR #1/ #2 — IF Equipped
SCCM/CRUISE CTL/DTV
TRLR TOW PARK LMP — If Equipped
HORN
HD ACCY #2 — If Equipped
HD ACCY #1 — If Equipped
TPM/CORAX
Spare
7
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F96
F97
F98
F99
F100
F101
F102
F103
F104
F105
F106
F107
F108
F109
F110
F111
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
* Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet
from F43 battery fed power to this position F45 which is fed
when the ignition in ON.
Description
PWR MIRROR SW
RADIO/TBM
SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
Spare
ESC-ECU & VALVES
DTCM
DUAL USB PORT
HD ACCY #3 — If Equipped
PPU COOL PUMP — If Equipped
ICS/HVAC
ESC-PUMP MTR
TRLR TOW STOP/TURN LT — If Equipped
HD ACCY #4 — If Equipped
TRLR TOW STOP/TURN RT — If Equipped
POWER INVERTER
TRLR TOW BACKUP — If Equipped
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
7
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Location
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear cargo area.
To remove jack and tools proceed as follows:
2. Remove the hardware storage cover by pinching the
latch on the left side and pulling upward.
1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.
Hardware Storage Cover Latch
Load Floor
NOTE: The load floor can be removed for easier access by
pulling the load floor directly rearward.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395
7
Jack And Lug Wrench
3. Turn the black plastic wing nut counterclockwise to
loosen the jack from the storage bin.
Plastic Wing Nut Location
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Spare Tire Removal
Stowing The Replaced Spare Tire
1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire
cover, if equipped.
1. Mount the spare tire onto the carrier. Torque down lug
nuts and locking lug nut.
2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning the lock bolt
to the left with the #T40 Torx head driver and ratchet
from the supplied tool kit.
2. Reinstall the camera cover and the return lock bolt to the
lock position with the provided tools.
3. Reinstall the tire cover if applicable.
NOTE: If you have added aftermarket accessories to the
spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross weight
of 85 lbs (38.5 kg) including the weight of the spare tire.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Unlock Rear Camera Cover
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them
counterclockwise. If equipped, remove the locking lug
nut with the lock key (located in the glove box) turning
it counterclockwise.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual
transmission into REVERSE.
5. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
7
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored
location.
Assembled Jack And Tools
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle.
Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
7
Rear Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
400 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
11. Secure the jack and tools in their proper locations.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
12. Secure the damaged wheel/tire on the spare tire carrier. Torque down lug nuts and locking lug nut.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
and remove the jack.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”
for correct lug nut torque.
10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
13. Reinstall the camera cover and return the lock bolt to
the lock position by turning the lock to the right using
the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s
seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the
Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by
proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
7
402 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Remove the manual park release cover, located above
the gear selector, to access the release tether strap.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether
strap up through the opening in the console base.
Manual Park Release Cover
Tether Strap
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left until the release
lever locks into place in the vertical position. The vehicle
is now out of PARK and can be moved. Release the
parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 403
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it from the
“locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever downward and to
the right, into its original position.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console, and
reinstall the cover.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
7
404 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the
engine compartment, behind the Power Distribution Center.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL)
and turn the ignition to LOCK.
Positive Battery Post
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 405
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7
406 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2000 rpm
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel and
can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested at
an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 407
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift
back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE
(with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without
spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
7
408 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
DRIVE or REVERSE.
• Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again
to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 409
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
the “Starting And Operating” section.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF The Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
4WD MODELS
See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating”.
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear
(NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
7
410 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in
order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Four–Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer
case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
(for automatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if
a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 411
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated tow
strap.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended
when towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle
damage.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Maintenance Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ 2.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
䡵 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
8
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
䡵 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . . .474
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .471
䡵 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Carpet Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Leather Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change
Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster display, “Oil
Change Required” will be displayed and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On non-instrument cluster display equipped vehicles,
“Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer
and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Warning And
Indicator Lights” or “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
8
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and automatic transmission, and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for
the required maintenance intervals.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
Inspect all door latches for presence of grease,
reapply if necessary.
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary
Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air
filter.
Replace Spark Plugs –
2.0L Engine**
Replace spark plugs –
3.6L Engine**
Flush and replace the engine, intercooler (if equipped), battery (if
equipped), and Motor Generator
Unit (MGU) (if equipped) coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Change the manual transmission
fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: trailer towing, snow
plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial
service), off-road, desert operation
or more than 50% of your driving
is at sustained high speeds during
hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Change transfer case fluid if using
your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
Change front and rear axle fluid if
using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L Engine
8
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Battery
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
8 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
9 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Reservoir — If Equipped
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
11 — Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit (If Equipped) Coolant
Pressure Cap
12 — Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit (If Equipped) Coolant
Reservoir
13 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
14 — Engine Air Cleaner
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.6L Engine
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Battery
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
Brake Fluid Reservoir
8 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
9 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Reservoir — If Equipped
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
11 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Pressure Cap — If Equipped
12 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir — If Equipped
13 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
14 — Engine Air Cleaner
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a
warmed up engine has been shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
bottom of the crosshatch zone will result in a reading at the
top of the crosshatch zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid reservoir
is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be
exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
(Continued)
8
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts and free of
corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery
that the positive cable is attached to the positive post
and the negative cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-)
(Continued)
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil Selection 3.6L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-13340.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-13340 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown
in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
8
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
1. Loosen the retainers from the air cleaner cover using a
suitable tool.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Retainers
2 — Air Filter Cover
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
2. Tighten air cleaner cover retainers using a suitable tool.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
8
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a —
If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
8
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and
lower the door.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the air filter
access door to the HVAC housing.
5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet housing.
Pull the filter elements out pinching them to the right for
clearance.
8
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
Air Filter
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Close A/C Air Filter access door and secure retaining
tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position
ensuring you have properly engaged the travel damper.
Travel Dampener
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
8
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
• Foreign Material
• Hardening Or Cracking
• Deformation Or Fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Cover
Wiper Arm
Release Tab
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, raise
the cover, press the release tab on the wiper blade and
while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the
wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm,
latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible
click then close the cover.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Wiper Arm J Hook
J Hook Retainer
Cover
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
8
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Open tailgate to access the wiper arm.
2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate wiper blade
outward to disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm.
Rear Wiper Assembly
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
3. Gently set the arm on the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the
end of the wiper arm and rotate the wiper in to place.
3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the tail gate.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
(Continued)
8
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if
equipped), and Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (if equipped)
coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the
onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine,
battery (if equipped), intercooler (if equipped), and MGU
(if equipped) coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of
the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face
of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the
radiator core.
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if
equipped), and MGU (if equipped) cooling system hoses
for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator.
Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE
THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an local authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
8
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032),
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact your local
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level
of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
8
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be within the OK range between the ADD
and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine
coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle without
tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the coolant
level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
8
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Brake System
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
WARNING!
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level within the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the
top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads
are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the
system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
8
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) below
the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug.
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler
plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported
by the axles
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Manual Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
Selection Of Lubricant
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below the
bottom of the hole.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with water,
it should be changed immediately. Otherwise, change the
fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan. Refer to
the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
8
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
8
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
8
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
Metric Example For Load Limit
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tires — General Information
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
Fuel Economy
CAUTION!
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
judgement when determining proper
may look properly inflated even when
inflated.
a good quality
make a visual
inflation. Tires
they are under-
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
8
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Tire Spinning
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
8
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
(Continued)
8
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure
adversely affect the safety and handling of
designation or
sidewall. Use
to do so may
your vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
8
468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome
plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to
always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
8
470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• 245/75R17 tire with the use of a traction device that
meets the SAE type “Class S” specification is recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
8
472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
Tire Rotation
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
8
474 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
What Causes Corrosion?
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Preserving The Bodywork
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
8
476 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s interior trim
and top, follow these precautions:
• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior
trim.
• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top
material, as damage may result.
• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on
the paint, leaving a streak.
• After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always make
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
• Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top Windows.”
Washing – Use Mopar Car Wash or equivalent, or mild
soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft bristles.
If extra cleaning is required, use Mopar Convertible Cloth
Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the
entire top, but support the top from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing
the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember to allow
the top to dry before lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force past the weather strips.
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 477
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which
can be scratched unless special care is taken by following
these directions:
• When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraper
or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you must
clean the window quickly.
• Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the window, not up and down. Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window
Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine scratches to
improve visibility and provides UV protection to help
prevent yellowing.
• Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have an impact on plastic retainer operation. Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing
will eventually impact window plastic retainer operation. To maintain ease of use of the window plastic
retainers, each window plastic retainer should be
cleaned and lubricated regularly. Clean them with a
mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning products
are available through an authorized dealer.
• When washing, never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as alcohol
or harsh cleaning agents.
• Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the
windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may damage the windows.
• Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe
with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
8
478 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
INTERIORS
Carpet Removal
Front Carpets (Two And Four Door Models):
1. Remove the front grommets.
Front Carpet Pulled Away
Front Carpet
1 — Grommets
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 479
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat. First for the
rear carpet and then the front carpet.
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the carpet split
and then pull out the rear edge and slide the carpet to
the front (do not remove the harness).
8
Front And Rear Carpet Split
Rear Underside Of Front Seat
1 — Harness
2 — Carpet Split
480 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat bracket and
then remove the last two grommets.
Rear Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left and
one right).
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open the carpet
split around the front seats brackets.
Front Seat And Floor
1 — Grommets
2 — Carpet Split
6. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in
reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle
1 — Carpet Split
3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left and
one right). First the grommet for the cargo carpet and
then the rear carpet.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 481
4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet split
around the rear seats brackets.
Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the rear seats.
2. Remove the sides grommets (one left and one right).
First the grommet from the side carpet and then the rear
carpet.
8
Under Rear Seat
1 — Carpet Split
5. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in
reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Side Carpet
1 — Grommet
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left and
one right).
482 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and open the carpet
split around the front seats brackets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left and
one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the rear and open the carpet split
around the seat belt attachment.
Pull Carpet To The Rear
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
5. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in
reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Under Rear Seat
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 483
3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and the side
support and then pull the carpet out.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap Hider:
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left and
one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet split
around the seat belt attachment and under the center
seat bracket.
8
Rear Load Floor
1 — Side Supports
2 — Load Floor
4. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in
reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Under Rear Seat
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Grommets
3 — Rear Carpet
484 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in
reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked under
the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Side Carpet (Four Door Models):
3. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in
reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
1. Remove the side grommet (one left and one right).
Side Carpet (Two Door Models):
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then all
around the perimeter and open the carpet split around
the seat belt attachment.
1. Remove the side grommet and then the lower one (left
and right).
Inside Sidewall
1 — Top Flange
2 — Grommet
3 — Side Carpet
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then all
around the perimeter and open the carpet split around
the seat belt attachment.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 485
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Inside Sidewall
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Top Flange
Side Carpet
Grommets
Carpet Split
3. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in
reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
8
486 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 487
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .490
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .494
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .490
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .494
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ 2.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
9
490 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the A pillar, visible from outside of the
vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears
underbody, on the right side of the frame rail near the
center of the vehicle, as well as on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of
the engine block.
Torque Specifications
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
130 Ft-Lbs (176
N·m)
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Vehicle Identification Number
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 491
Spare Tire Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
59 Ft-Lbs
(80 N·m)
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
22 mm
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Spare tire torque is for the spare tire carrier located on the
tailgate.
9
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface
492 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING!
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.0L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations, and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. For optimal performance the use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline
is recommended in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 493
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline
is
recommended.
Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
9
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
(Continued)
494 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION! (Continued)
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 495
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
9
496 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models
Four Door Models
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L Engine
3.6L Engine
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
2.0L Engine Intercooler without Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
2.0L Engine Intercooler with Motor
Generator Unit (MGU) (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
21.5 Gallons
70 Liters
81 Liters
5 Quarts
5 Quarts
4.73 Liters
4.73 Liters
9.9 Quarts
9.4 Liters
3.2 Quarts
3.0 Liters
3.5 Quarts
3.3 Liters
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 497
U.S.
2.5 Quarts
2.0L Battery Coolant (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
10.7 Quarts
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
1.9 Quarts
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU)
(Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
2.5 Quarts
3.6L Battery Coolant (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
2.4 Liters
10.1 Liters
1.8 Liters
2.4 Liters
9
498 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit (if equipped)
Battery Coolant (if equipped)
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Fully
Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-13340 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 499
Component
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane Minimum – 91 Octane Recommended, 0-15%
Ethanol.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
(Continued)
(Continued)
9
500 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION! (Continued)
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Transfer Case
Axle Differential (Front)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant
(SAE 75W85)(API GL-5)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 501
Component
Axle Differential (Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant
(SAE 75W85)(API GL-5). Models equipped with Trac-Lok
Limited Slip Differential require a friction modifier additive.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE
J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4,
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
9
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . .556
䡵 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .557
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .561
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
䡵 OFF ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Off Road Pages Status Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Drivetrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Pitch And Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Accessory Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
10
504 MULTIMEDIA
▫ Climate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Navigation (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — If Equipped . . .573
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Register (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C NAV). . . . . . . .574
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Mobile App (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV). . . . . . . . . . . . .575
MULTIMEDIA
505
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
10
506 MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
MULTIMEDIA
507
NOTE:
UCONNECT SETTINGS
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in “Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian” in your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
touchscreen.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the
Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In
addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the
right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus
and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Mute
buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out of
a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
10
508 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3
Settings
Push the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available programmable features.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
Uconnect 3 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On
The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the “MAR/RUN” position.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with the selectable
options pertaining to each setting.
MULTIMEDIA
509
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Brightness
Selectable Options
Auto
+
Manual
-
NOTE:
The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on
the touchscreen.
Language
English
Français
Español
NOTE:
Selecting any option within the “Language” setting will change the language for all displayed nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped).
Touchscreen
Beep
10
510 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Units
US
Selectable Options
Metric
Custom
NOTE:
• The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.
• The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L) and “Pressure” (kPa, or bar)
units of measure independently.
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Set Time and Format
12 hour
Selectable Options
24 hour
AM
PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Show Time Status —
If Equipped
Sync Time — If Equipped
511
Selectable Options
On
Off
On
Off
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
10
512 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines —
If Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
Sound and Display
Rear ParkSense Volume —
Low
Medium
High
If Equipped
Front ParkSense Volume —
Low
Medium
High
If Equipped
Blind Spot Alert —
Off
Lights
Lights and Chime
If Equipped
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) not operating to specification.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Blind Spot Alert —
If Equipped
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers —
If Equipped
Auto Park Brake
Off
Selectable Options
Lights
On
513
Lights and Chime
Off
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
Selectable Options
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Automatic High Beam HeadOn
Off
lamps — If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights
Yes
No
Flash Lights With Lock —
On
Off
If Equipped
10
514 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Interior Ambient Lights
Selectable Options
+
-
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and
“-” buttons on the touchscreen.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
On
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK
or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Flash Lights With Lock
Horn With Lock
Horn With Remote Start —
If Equipped
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock
515
Selectable Options
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Driver
All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you
must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors
will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock
when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening
once. If the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key
fob).
10
516 MULTIMEDIA
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort Systems” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn
on.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
Selectable Options
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
MULTIMEDIA
517
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Equalizer
Bass
Selectable Options
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade
Up Arrow
Down ArLeft Arrow
Right ArCenter “C”
Button
row Button
Button
row Button
Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
10
518 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Loudness
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
+
-
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Selectable Options
List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
MULTIMEDIA
519
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Channel Skip
Selectable Options
List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
10
520 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4
Settings
521
Press the “Settings” button on the bottom bar, or press the
” button, then press the “Settings” button on
“Apps
the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all
of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Touchscreen
and Faceplate Buttons
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display radio, along
with the selectable options pertaining to each setting.
10
522 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Language
English
Selectable Options
Espanol
Francais
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Display
Brightness
Headlights On
Display
Brightness
Headlights
Off
AutoShow
Selectable Options
Auto
+
Manual
-
+
-
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Touchscreen
Beep
Control
Screen
Timeout
Phone Popups Displayed
in Cluster
523
Selectable Options
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Units
US
Selectable Options
Metric
Custom
NOTE:
• The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.
• The “Custom” option allows setting the “Distance, Fuel Consumption” (MPG (US), MPG(UK), L/100km, or km/L),“Pressure” (kPa, or bar) and “Temperature” (C, or F) units of measure independently.
10
524 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Time & Date
After pressing the “Time & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Set Time Hours
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours.
Set Time Minutes
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes.
Time Format
Selectable Options
+
-
+
-
12hrs
AM
24hrs
PM
MULTIMEDIA
525
Camera
After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera Delay —
If Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guide Lines — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed
Guide Lines — If Equipped
10
526 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Driving Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the “Safety/Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkSense — If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Volume
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Sound
Low
Selectable Options
Sound and Display
Medium
High
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Interior Ambient Lights
Selectable Options
+
-
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and
“-” buttons on the touchscreen.
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Auto Dim High Beams —
If Equipped
527
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock —
If Equipped
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
10
528 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Auto Unlock On Exit
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK
or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
Driver Door
Remote Door Unlock
Personal Settings Linked To Key
Fob — If Equipped
All Doors
Engine Off Options — If Equipped
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Doors On Engine
Off Power Delay
Doors Off Engine
Off Power Delay
Headlight Off Delay
Selectable Options
+
-
+
-
+
-
MULTIMEDIA
529
Aux Switches
After pressing the “Aux Switches” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Aux 1-4
Selectable Options
Type
Power Source
Recalled Last State
Latching
Battery
Momentary
Ignition
NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance & Fade
10
Selectable Options
Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance & Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
530 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Equalizer
Bass
Selectable Options
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
Loudness
Yes
No
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
+
-
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.
MULTIMEDIA
531
Phone
After pressing the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Do Not Disturb
Paired Phones And Audio Devices
Selectable Options
Do Not Distrurb Options
List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Channel Skip
10
Selectable Options
List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
532 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Subscription Info
Selectable Options
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Cancel
MULTIMEDIA
533
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
10
534 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4/4C NAV Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings
” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows
you to access all of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Touchscreen and Faceplate Buttons
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 4/4C NAV radio, along with the
selectable options pertaining to each setting.
MULTIMEDIA
535
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
Selectable Options
Manual
+
Auto
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
+
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme
NOTE:
When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the ⬙Set Theme⬙
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the
setting has been selected.
10
536 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Set Language
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep
Control Screen Time-Out
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the Instrument Cluster Display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
MULTIMEDIA
537
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Units
US
Selectable Options
Metric
Custom
NOTE:
• The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.
• The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L), “Pressure” (kPa, or bar), and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measure independently.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
10
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
538 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
Set Time Hours
Selectable Options
+
-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes
+
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format
12hrs
24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA
539
Camera
After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera Delay —
If Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guide Lines — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed
Guide Lines — If Equipped
10
540 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkSense — If Equipped
Front ParkSense Volume
Rear ParkSense Volume
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
Sound Only
Low
Low
Off
Selectable Options
Sound and Display
Medium
High
Medium
High
Lights
Lights & Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A
sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Mirror and Wipers
After pressing the “Mirror and Wipers” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
Selectable Options
On
On
Off
Off
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
— If Equipped
Headlights with Wipers
541
Selectable Options
On
Off
On
Off
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
Selectable Options
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Daytime Running Lights
Yes
No
Flash Lights With Lock —
On
Off
If Equipped
Interior Ambient Lights
+
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and
“-” buttons on the touchscreen.
10
542 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Auto Dim High Beams —
If Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Unlock On Exit
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped
Sound Horn With Remote Start —
If Equipped
Off
1st Press
2nd Press
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door
543
Selectable Options
All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob
unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock, no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s
door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can
be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob —
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
10
544 MULTIMEDIA
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort Systems” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel
With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Aux Switches — If Equipped
After pressing the “Aux Switches” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Aux 1-4
Type
Power Source
Recalled Last State
Selectable Options
Latching
Battery
Momentary
Ignition
NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
MULTIMEDIA
545
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Doors On Engine
Off Power Delay
Doors Off Engine
Off Power Delay
Headlight Off Delay
Selectable Options
+
-
+
-
+
-
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
Selectable Options
Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
10
546 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Equalizer
Bass
Selectable Options
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
+
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Selectable Options
List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Paired Audio Sources
547
Selectable Options
List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
This feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to
the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Channel Skip
Selectable Options
List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
10
548 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Subscription Info
Selectable Options
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Cancel
MULTIMEDIA
549
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
10
550 MULTIMEDIA
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Software Licenses
Selectable Options
Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Licensing Information” screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website
for the radio.
Map Update
Download System Information To
Generate Request Code
USB
NOTE:
The “Download System Information To USB” will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio.
Whereas the “Generate Request Code” will display a code for the user to input online when downloading the maps.
MULTIMEDIA
551
OFF ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with Off Road Pages, which
provides the vehicle status while operating on off road
conditions. It supplies information relating to the vehicle
ride height, the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll
of the vehicle (if equipped).
To access Off Road Pages, press the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen, and then select “Off Road Pages”.
Main Menu
1 — Off Road Pages App
2 — Uconnect Apps Button
10
552 MULTIMEDIA
Off Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
• Drivetrain
• Pitch and Roll
• Accessory Gauge
Off Road Pages Status Bar
The Off Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom
of Off Road Pages and is present in each of the three
selectable page options. It provides continually updating
information for the following items:
• Current Transfer Case Status
• Current Latitude/Longitude
• Current Altitude of the vehicle
• Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control and Selected
Speed in MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Transfer Case Status
Current Latitude/Longitude
Current Altitude
Hill Decent Control
MULTIMEDIA
553
Drivetrain
The Drivetrain page displays information concerning the
vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
• Steering angle in degrees
• Status of Transfer Case
• Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Steering Angle
Sway Bar
Front Axle Locker Status
Rear Axle Locker Status
10
554 MULTIMEDIA
Pitch And Roll
The Pitch And Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in
degrees. The pitch and roll gauges provide a visualization
of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch And Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
MULTIMEDIA
555
Accessory Gauges
The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil
Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature,
and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
Battery Voltage
Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmissions Only)
10
556 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/CD/
USB/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
MULTIMEDIA
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Media Hub is located on the Instrument Panel, below
the Climate Controls. Behind the Media Hub access door
contains one AUX port, a Type C USB Port and one
standard USB Port. Both USB Ports allow you to play
music from iPod/MP3 players or USB devices through
your vehicle’s sound system.
557
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C port,
connection to the Type A port will be lost. Alternatively, if
a device is plugged into the Type C port and another device
is plugged into the Type A port, the Type C device
maintains primary connection.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your
device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned off.
NOTE:
• The Type C USB port is the primary media port for the
radio. Two devices can be plugged in at the same time
and both ports provide charging capabilities, but only
one port can transfer data to the head unit at a time.
10
• Both ports share a single data connection. However, the
user cannot switch between Type A or Type C.
USB Connection
1 — Type A Plugged In
2 — Type C Plugged In
3 — Type A And Type C Plugged In
558 MULTIMEDIA
Media Hub
1 — AUX Port
2 — Type C USB Port
3 — Type A USB Port
Located inside the center console, a second USB Port
allows you to play music from iPod/MP3 players or USB
devices through your vehicle’s sound system.
Center Console USB
MULTIMEDIA
559
A third and fourth USB Ports are located behind the center
console, above the Power Inverter. One is a charge only
port, and can only charge USB devices. The other USB Port
allows you to play music from iPod/MP3 players or USB
devices through your vehicle’s sound system.
Device Plugged In Message Screen
USB On The Back Of The Center Console
1 — Type C And Standard USB Ports
2 — Type C And Standard Charge Only USB Ports
10
560 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Plugged In Message Screen
Phone or USB Plugged In Message Screen
NOTE: Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be lost.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could
result in a collision.
MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
561
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
562 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4,
or Uconnect 4/4C NAV system.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
Uconnect 3
MULTIMEDIA
563
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4/4C NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps
menus, of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4
with 8.4-inch display system.
10
564 MULTIMEDIA
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons — If Equipped
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions. For
8.4-inch Displays Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
565
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
• “Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
10
Uconnect 3 Radio
566 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio
MULTIMEDIA
567
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices.
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 3 Media
10
568 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 Media
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Media
MULTIMEDIA
569
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
following commandsѧ
. After the beep, say one of the
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
Uconnect 3 Phone
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “ Call
John Smith work.”
10
570 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 Phone
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Phone
MULTIMEDIA
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the
Phone button
and say “ Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
. After the beep, say: “ Reply.”
Phone button
571
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this
feature.
For
details
about
MAP,
visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
Start without
No.
me.
Okay.
Where are you?
Are you there
Call me.
yet?
I need
I’ll call you later.
directions.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
RESPONSES
See you later.
I’ll be late.
10
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
Turn On “Show Notifications”
572 MULTIMEDIA
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• “ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Climate
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 4C with 8.4–inch display system.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
beep, say:
. After the
MULTIMEDIA
• For the Uconnect 4 System, say: “ Enter state.”
SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — If Equipped
• For the 4C NAV Uconnect System, say: “ Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
573
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
touchscreen to get started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
10
574 MULTIMEDIA
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
Remote Vehicle Start**
• U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
Remote Horn & Lights
• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian/
ca.
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C NAV)
Vehicle Health Alert**
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs
if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle
will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects
issues with its key systems that need your attention. For
further information, refer to your owner’s manual.
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
MULTIMEDIA
Mobile App (4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands.
575
• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation
system.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the
app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call
Centers.
NOTE:
For
further
information
please
visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect App:
• Download the Uconnect App to your mobile device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom
of the app for Vehicle Info.
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely.
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not
available for Uconnect 4 system.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• “Show fuel prices”
• “Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “Show extended weather”
10
576 MULTIMEDIA
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free
Available
MULTIMEDIA
577
Android Auto — If Equipped
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factoryprovided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
10
578 MULTIMEDIA
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
MULTIMEDIA
579
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
10
580 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
Additional Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit siriusxm.com/guardian or call:
1-844-796-4827
• Canadian
residents
visit
www.siriusxm.com/
guardian/ca or call: 1-877-324-9091
MULTIMEDIA
581
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged, (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .587
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .585
11
584 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 585
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (888) 242-6342
Fax: (787) 782-3345
11
586 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 587
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
11
588 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
In Canada
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
12
590 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243, 247
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245, 247
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Air Bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187, 243, 287
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .427
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 432
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430, 431
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 430
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442, 496
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Audio Systems (Radio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308, 450
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449, 450
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449, 500
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . .313
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .166
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
INDEX 591
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Axle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 423
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446, 500
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 381
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 380
Bumper End Cap Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 495
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Carpeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393, 450
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .200
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .277
12
592 INDEX
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .269
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .266
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . . .557
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444, 445
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 444, 445
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .442, 496, 498
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 199
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 191
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 191
Door Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
INDEX 593
Door Frame Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Door Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . . .37
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 46
Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Dual Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .166
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .333
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .189
Emergency Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393, 450
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .200
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 422
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 422
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 495
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492, 496
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 496, 498
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 496
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294, 295
Engine Oil Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
12
594 INDEX
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 495
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 439
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 289
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Fabric Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 432
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 498
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 289, 382, 383
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Fog Light Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Folding Rear Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 49
Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315, 318
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492, 498
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
INDEX 595
Fueling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . .157, 161
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 346
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 309
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Gross Axle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Hard Top, Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .64
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . . .64
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 374
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174, 198
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Instrument Cluster Display
Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Interior And Instrument Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
12
596 INDEX
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Jack Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393, 397, 398, 450
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .20
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .21
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Key, Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 29
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 380
Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187, 243, 287
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 381
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 199
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .193
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
INDEX 597
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 381
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .194, 225
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 289, 382, 383
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .190, 198
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Locking Axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .193, 200
Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302, 448
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448, 500
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 374
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Modular Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
12
598 INDEX
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492, 498
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 498
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 498
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 496
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 496
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .6, 588
Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . .456
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Sliding Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Power Convertible Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
INDEX 599
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 28, 29
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . .357
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . .358
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .556
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . . . .28
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 29
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
12
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . .
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . .
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.286
.289
.587
.286
600 INDEX
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .238
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .241
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232, 286
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .238
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232, 234, 236
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 45
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 49
Fold And Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 49
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 46
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 46
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 29
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
INDEX 601
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306, 308
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Side Step Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 289, 382, 383
Siri. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
SiriusXM Guardian
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Soft Top, Four Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Soft Top, Lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 125
Soft Top, Raising. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 125
Soft Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Soft Top, Two Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 467, 468, 469
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 294, 295
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .556
Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326, 330
Storage, Behind the Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 473
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
12
602 INDEX
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . . .245
Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Swing Gate, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Tire And Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . .456
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 460, 467, 472
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393, 450
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460, 467
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393, 398, 450
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456, 457
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 460
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 467, 468, 469
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348, 351, 409
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .356
INDEX 603
Trac-Lok Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351, 352
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .315, 318
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308, 449
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . .157
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 382, 383
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . . .557
Universal Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346, 457
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 473
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .192
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
12
604 INDEX
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 146
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Windows
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Windshield, Folding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 423
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
18JL-126-AA
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
First Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising